TW201021037A - Information recording medium and recording/reproduction apparatus - Google Patents
Information recording medium and recording/reproduction apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- TW201021037A TW201021037A TW098133160A TW98133160A TW201021037A TW 201021037 A TW201021037 A TW 201021037A TW 098133160 A TW098133160 A TW 098133160A TW 98133160 A TW98133160 A TW 98133160A TW 201021037 A TW201021037 A TW 201021037A
- Authority
- TW
- Taiwan
- Prior art keywords
- recording
- length
- mark
- interval
- record
- Prior art date
Links
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B7/00—Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
- G11B7/004—Recording, reproducing or erasing methods; Read, write or erase circuits therefor
- G11B7/006—Overwriting
- G11B7/0062—Overwriting strategies, e.g. recording pulse sequences with erasing level used for phase-change media
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B20/00—Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
- G11B20/10—Digital recording or reproducing
- G11B20/10009—Improvement or modification of read or write signals
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B20/00—Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
- G11B20/10—Digital recording or reproducing
- G11B20/10009—Improvement or modification of read or write signals
- G11B20/10046—Improvement or modification of read or write signals filtering or equalising, e.g. setting the tap weights of an FIR filter
- G11B20/10055—Improvement or modification of read or write signals filtering or equalising, e.g. setting the tap weights of an FIR filter using partial response filtering when writing the signal to the medium or reading it therefrom
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B20/00—Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
- G11B20/10—Digital recording or reproducing
- G11B20/10009—Improvement or modification of read or write signals
- G11B20/10268—Improvement or modification of read or write signals bit detection or demodulation methods
- G11B20/10277—Improvement or modification of read or write signals bit detection or demodulation methods the demodulation process being specifically adapted to partial response channels, e.g. PRML decoding
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B20/00—Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
- G11B20/10—Digital recording or reproducing
- G11B20/10009—Improvement or modification of read or write signals
- G11B20/10305—Improvement or modification of read or write signals signal quality assessment
- G11B20/10453—Improvement or modification of read or write signals signal quality assessment physical shape of recording marks, e.g. their length, width, depth or contour
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B20/00—Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
- G11B20/10—Digital recording or reproducing
- G11B20/10009—Improvement or modification of read or write signals
- G11B20/10481—Improvement or modification of read or write signals optimisation methods
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B7/00—Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
- G11B7/007—Arrangement of the information on the record carrier, e.g. form of tracks, actual track shape, e.g. wobbled, or cross-section, e.g. v-shaped; Sequential information structures, e.g. sectoring or header formats within a track
- G11B7/00736—Auxiliary data, e.g. lead-in, lead-out, Power Calibration Area [PCA], Burst Cutting Area [BCA], control information
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B7/00—Recording or reproducing by optical means, e.g. recording using a thermal beam of optical radiation by modifying optical properties or the physical structure, reproducing using an optical beam at lower power by sensing optical properties; Record carriers therefor
- G11B7/12—Heads, e.g. forming of the optical beam spot or modulation of the optical beam
- G11B7/125—Optical beam sources therefor, e.g. laser control circuitry specially adapted for optical storage devices; Modulators, e.g. means for controlling the size or intensity of optical spots or optical traces
- G11B7/126—Circuits, methods or arrangements for laser control or stabilisation
- G11B7/1267—Power calibration
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B20/00—Signal processing not specific to the method of recording or reproducing; Circuits therefor
- G11B20/10—Digital recording or reproducing
- G11B20/12—Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers
- G11B2020/1264—Formatting, e.g. arrangement of data block or words on the record carriers wherein the formatting concerns a specific kind of data
- G11B2020/1265—Control data, system data or management information, i.e. data used to access or process user data
- G11B2020/1278—Physical format specifications of the record carrier, e.g. compliance with a specific standard, recording density, number of layers, start of data zone or lead-out
- G11B2020/1279—Permanent information and control data stored in the PIC zone of a Blu-Ray disc
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G11—INFORMATION STORAGE
- G11B—INFORMATION STORAGE BASED ON RELATIVE MOVEMENT BETWEEN RECORD CARRIER AND TRANSDUCER
- G11B2220/00—Record carriers by type
- G11B2220/20—Disc-shaped record carriers
- G11B2220/25—Disc-shaped record carriers characterised in that the disc is based on a specific recording technology
- G11B2220/2537—Optical discs
- G11B2220/2541—Blu-ray discs; Blue laser DVR discs
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Optical Recording Or Reproduction (AREA)
- Signal Processing For Digital Recording And Reproducing (AREA)
- Optical Head (AREA)
- Optical Record Carriers And Manufacture Thereof (AREA)
Abstract
Description
201021037 六、發明說明: 【發明所屬^^技彳衧領域】 技術領域 本發明是有關於-種記錄光學資訊之資訊記錄媒體及 S己錄再生裝置,特別是有關於可調整記錄條件,且可安定 地實現高密度記錄之資訊記錄媒體及記錄再生裝置。 【前^^椅J 背景技術 為了錄影影像或錄音聲音、儲存電腦之資料等,各種 可記錄之資訊記錄媒體被實用化。例如,主要用於錄音聲 音或儲存電腦之資料的CD、用於錄影影像或儲存電腦之資 料的DVDe普及,近年來,職#可錄影如數倾放之高 畫質的高視覺影像的BD(Blu-ray Disc)。 前述所謂影像、聲音、或電腦之資料的資訊,係作為 使用者資料而記錄於資訊記錄媒體。具體而言,首先於使 用者貢料附加訂正錯誤碼,調變成由具有預定範圍長度之 記錄記號及間隔所構成之資料列。資料列係使用光束而圮 錄於資訊記錄媒體的軌道。又,記錄於資訊記錄媒體之資 訊,係將光束照射於軌道,而從包含對應資料列的反射光, 亦即從包含對應記錄記號及間隔之資訊的反射光,產生類 比再生訊號。從再生訊號產生數位訊號之資料列,解碼後, 藉由實施錯誤訂正而獲得使用者資料。 第1圖顯示用以在資訊記錄媒體形成記錄記號之各種 訊號。第1圖的(a)部份顯示週期Tw之通道時脈訊號,其係 3 201021037 作為作成記錄資料時之基準訊號。第1圖的(b)部份顯示 NRZI(Non Return to Zero Inverting)訊號,其係依據通道時 脈訊號而將應記錄之資訊調變後之調變碼。 例如在BD的情形下,NRZI訊號係藉由使用以週期Tw 作為基準之長度2T(2xTw)至8T的記錄記號及間隔,而將應 記錄之資訊調變而獲得者。第1圖的(b)部份則係顯示作為 NRZI訊號之部份例的2T記號-2T間隔-4T記號之圖型。 第1圖的(c)部份及(d)部份,係分別顯示依據NRZI訊號 而產生之記錄雷射之記錄脈波列及形成於資訊記錄媒體之 資料列(記錄記號列)。 各長度之記錄記號,係由至少包含初始脈波(亦稱為首 脈波)之記錄脈波列所形成。記錄記號對應長度,可更包含 末脈波及位於初始脈波與末脈波之間的1個以上之中間脈 波。初始脈波的脈波寬度Ttop及末脈波的脈波寬度Tip係對 應記錄記號的長度而分別設定。中間脈波的脈波寬度Tmp 則於任何長度之記錄記號中皆為相同設定。 記錄脈波列之位準,亦即雷射強度,可分類為具有形 成記錄記號所必要之加熱效果的峰值功率Pp2〇l、具有冷卻 效果之底值功率Pb202及冷卻功率Pc203、及為於間隔部之 記錄功率的間隔功率Ps204。峰值功率Pp2〇l、底值功率 Pb202、冷卻功率Pc203、及間隔功率Ps204係以雷射光驟冷 時檢測出之驟冷位準205為基準而設定。 另外’底值功率Pb202與冷卻功率PC2〇3通常係設定成 同等之雷射功率。然而’為了記錄記號終端部的熱量調整, 201021037 冷卻功率Pc203亦可設定成與底值功率pb2〇2相異之值。 又,因為間隔部不需要形成記錄記號,一般間隔功率Ps204 係設定成低雷射功率(例如與再生功率或底值功率等同 等)。然而,在可重寫型光碟(例如,DVD-RAM或BD-RE) 中,有著消去既存之記錄記號而形成間隔部的需要。又, 在可燒錄型光碟(例如,DVD-R或BD-R)中則有賦予用以形 成下一個記錄記號之預熱功率的情況。因此,亦可將間隔 功率Ps204設定成較高之雷射功率。但是,即便於此情形, 亦不會將間隔功率Ps204設定成較峰值功率pp2〇l高的值。 在照射預定功率雷射的情形下所形成之記錄記號,係 依存於資訊記錄媒體之資訊記錄層的特性。因此,於資訊 記錄媒體中記錄有適合其資訊記錄層之記錄時的雷射發光 條件,如記錄脈波列的各雷射功率值及脈波寬度等。所以, 若能適當地再現業已記錄於資訊記錄媒體内部之記錄脈波 的各雷射功率及脈波寬度,則可形成記錄記號列。 但是’資訊記錄媒體之資訊記錄層的特性與記錄裝置 雷射發光特性,隨著各資訊記錄媒體及各記錄裝置而不一 致。又,隨著使用環境,熱的影響亦不同。又,亦會有發 生承受來自鄰接之記錄記號的熱干涉的情況。因此,記錄 裝置通常係進行測試記錄,評價獲得之再生訊號,並依據 評價結果微調整記錄雷射之脈波形狀,以至少每當裝填新 的資訊記錄媒體時,可形成正確之記錄記號。例如,在各 長度的記錄記號中,設定用以調整記錄記號之始端位置的 記錄開始位置偏位(0ffset)dTtop、用以調整終端位置的記錄 5 201021037 終了位置偏位dTs,且於測試記錄時調整該等偏位值。 另外’構成s己錄脈波列之記錄脈波除上述多脈波波形 以外,亦可為如第2圖(a)、(b)、及(c)部分所示之單脈波波 形、L型脈波波形、或堡型脈波波形。一般來說,在單脈波 波形中記錄記號越長則蓄積的熱量越多,在L型脈波波形中 記錄記號越長則蓄積的熱量降低。在堡型脈波波形中係調 整5己錄s己號終端部之熱量。在多脈波波形中則不依循記錄 記號的長度,蓄積的熱量為一定。考慮上述各點,選擇對 應資訊記錄媒體之資訊記錄層的膜特性之適當波形,特別 是對應蓄積熱量特性的適當波形。 近年來,影像變得高精細化,且要求更大容量之資訊 記錄媒體。為了提高如此之資訊記錄媒體的記錄密度,需 要使記錄資訊之記錄記號的大小更微小。然而,若記錄記 號縮小,則記錄記號之最短記號長接近光學鑑別限度之界 限,碼間干涉的增大及SNR(Signal Noise Ratio)的劣化會變 得更明顯。結果,無法正確地檢測出記錄記號的始端邊及 終端邊之位置,從再生訊號將業已記錄之資訊正確地解碼 將變得困難。 因此,由藉微小的記錄記號來記錄資訊之資訊記錄媒 體再生資訊時,通常會使用PRML(Partial Response Maximum Likelihood)方式等處理再生訊號。PRML方式係 組合部分響應(PR)與最大概率解碼(ML)之技術,係對產生 既知之碼間干涉時的再生訊號進行波形推定,而由推定之 波形選擇波形最有把握的再生訊號序列之方式。 201021037 又,若記錄記號變小會產生熱干涉 之熱會傳導至_部分,料下終端 产上弁減地丁一 記錄記號的始端之溫 眩錄記麵始叙齡影響前一 錄&之冷錢程。當發生如此技干济味 需要進行測試記錄以進行咖補償。間㈣㈣對2方 間隔或後方間隔的長度,改變 …月 dTt〇p)者。 變。己錄脈波之記錄參數(例如201021037 VI. Description of the Invention: [Technical Field] The present invention relates to an information recording medium for recording optical information and a S recording and reproducing device, and particularly relates to an adjustable recording condition, and An information recording medium and a recording and reproducing device that stably realize high-density recording. [Front ^^ Chair J Background Art Various recordable information recording media have been put into practical use in order to record video or record sound, store computer data, and the like. For example, a CD that is mainly used for recording sounds or storing computer data, a DVDe for recording video images or storing computer data, in recent years, a professional video can record high-definition high-definition video BD (Blu -ray Disc). The aforementioned information on images, sounds, or computer data is recorded on the information recording medium as user data. Specifically, first, the user's tribute is attached with a correction error code, and is converted into a data column composed of recording marks and intervals having a predetermined range length. The data is recorded on the track of the information recording medium using a light beam. Further, the information recorded on the information recording medium emits a light beam on the track, and generates a analog reproduction signal from the reflected light including the corresponding data column, that is, from the reflected light including the information corresponding to the recording mark and the interval. The data column of the digital signal is generated from the reproduced signal, and after decoding, the user data is obtained by implementing the error correction. Fig. 1 shows various signals for forming a recording mark on an information recording medium. Part (a) of Figure 1 shows the channel clock signal of period Tw, which is 3 201021037 as the reference signal for recording data. Part (b) of Figure 1 shows the NRZI (Non Return to Zero Inverting) signal, which is a modulation code that modulates the information to be recorded based on the channel clock signal. For example, in the case of BD, the NRZI signal is obtained by modulating the information to be recorded by using the recording marks and intervals of the length 2T (2xTw) to 8T with the period Tw as a reference. Part (b) of Fig. 1 shows a pattern of 2T mark-2T interval-4T mark as a part of the NRZI signal. Parts (c) and (d) of Fig. 1 show the recording pulse trains of the recorded lasers generated based on the NRZI signals and the data columns (recording marks) formed on the information recording medium. The record marks of each length are formed by a record pulse train containing at least an initial pulse wave (also referred to as a first pulse wave). The length corresponding to the record mark may further include a last pulse wave and one or more intermediate pulse waves between the initial pulse wave and the last pulse wave. The pulse width Ttop of the initial pulse wave and the pulse width Tip of the last pulse wave are set corresponding to the length of the recording mark. The pulse width Tmp of the intermediate pulse wave is the same in the record marks of any length. Recording the level of the pulse train, that is, the laser intensity, can be classified into a peak power Pp2〇l having a heating effect necessary for forming a recording mark, a bottom power Pb202 having a cooling effect, and a cooling power Pc203, and spacing The interval power Ps204 of the recording power. The peak power Pp2〇1, the bottom power Pb202, the cooling power Pc203, and the interval power Ps204 are set based on the quenching level 205 detected when the laser light is quenched. Further, the bottom power Pb 202 and the cooling power PC 2 〇 3 are usually set to be equal to the laser power. However, in order to adjust the heat amount of the terminal portion of the mark, the 201021037 cooling power Pc203 may be set to a value different from the bottom power pb2〇2. Further, since the spacer does not need to form a recording mark, the general interval power Ps204 is set to a low laser power (e.g., equivalent to the reproducing power or the bottom power). However, in a rewritable type optical disc (for example, a DVD-RAM or a BD-RE), there is a need to erase an existing recording mark to form a spacer. Further, in a recordable type optical disc (e.g., DVD-R or BD-R), there is a case where the preheating power for forming the next recording mark is given. Therefore, the interval power Ps204 can also be set to a higher laser power. However, even in this case, the interval power Ps204 is not set to a value higher than the peak power pp2〇l. The recording mark formed in the case of irradiating a predetermined power laser depends on the characteristics of the information recording layer of the information recording medium. Therefore, laser light-emitting conditions suitable for recording of the information recording layer, such as the respective laser power values and pulse widths of the pulse train, are recorded on the information recording medium. Therefore, if each of the laser power and the pulse width of the recording pulse wave which has been recorded in the information recording medium can be appropriately reproduced, a record symbol column can be formed. However, the characteristics of the information recording layer of the information recording medium and the laser emission characteristics of the recording device are inconsistent with each information recording medium and each recording device. Also, with the use of the environment, the effects of heat are different. Further, there is a case where thermal interference from adjacent recording marks is generated. Therefore, the recording device usually performs test recording, evaluates the obtained reproduced signal, and finely adjusts the shape of the pulse wave of the recorded laser according to the evaluation result, so that at least whenever a new information recording medium is loaded, a correct recording mark can be formed. For example, in the recording marks of the respective lengths, the recording start position offset (0ffset) dTtop for adjusting the start position of the recording mark, the record 5 for adjusting the end position, the 201021037 end position offset dTs, and the test recording time are set. Adjust the offset values. In addition, the recording pulse wave constituting the recorded pulse train may be a single pulse waveform as shown in parts (a), (b), and (c) of FIG. 2, in addition to the multi-pulse waveform described above. Pulse waveform, or fort-shaped pulse waveform. In general, the longer the recording mark is in the single pulse waveform, the more heat is accumulated, and the longer the recording mark is in the L-shaped pulse waveform, the lower the accumulated heat. In the fort-type pulse waveform, the heat of the terminal portion of the recorded number is recorded. In the multi-pulse waveform, the length of the recording mark is not followed, and the accumulated heat is constant. In consideration of the above points, an appropriate waveform of the film characteristics of the information recording layer corresponding to the information recording medium is selected, in particular, an appropriate waveform corresponding to the accumulated heat characteristics. In recent years, images have become highly refined and require more information recording media. In order to increase the recording density of such an information recording medium, it is necessary to make the size of the recording mark of the recorded information smaller. However, if the record mark is reduced, the shortest mark length of the record mark is close to the limit of the optical discrimination limit, and the increase in the inter-code interference and the deterioration of the SNR (Signal Noise Ratio) become more conspicuous. As a result, the position of the leading edge and the terminal side of the recording mark cannot be correctly detected, and it is difficult to correctly decode the recorded information from the reproduced signal. Therefore, when information recording media reproduction information is recorded by a small recording mark, the reproduction signal is usually processed using a PRML (Partial Response Maximum Likelihood) method or the like. The PRML method combines partial response (PR) and maximum probability decoding (ML) techniques to perform waveform estimation on a reproduced signal when a known inter-code interference occurs, and a reproducible signal sequence in which the waveform is selected with the most certain waveform from the estimated waveform. the way. 201021037 In addition, if the record mark becomes smaller, the heat of thermal interference will be transmitted to the _ part, and the end of the temperature will be recorded at the beginning of the record. Cold money. When such a skill occurs, a test record is required for coffee compensation. (4) (4) For the length of the 2 square interval or the rear interval, change ... month dTt〇p). change. The recorded parameters of the recorded pulse wave (for example
波二=慮=干涉與熱干涉的影響之習知的記錄脈 波控制方法,有例如專散獻1及專利文獻2。 專散獻冰揭示之枝,錢紅確_時所獲得之 確位元列、與正確位元列的1位元發生移位之最易紗之 =錄元7 ,藉由分別算出再生訊號與兩位元列的歐氏距 平估、&適應ϋ等化之再生訊號檢測出各圖案(⑽該) 之f緣的偏移方向與偏移量。然後,對應業已對應各圖案 之月』述邊緣的偏移方向與偏移量,對由卿成之記錄記號 =號長射後之咖長心狀適麟記錄參數進行最 專利文獻2 ’係在正讀位元列及錯誤位元列發生工位元 移位之邊緣部份巾,將經適雜等化之再生訊號的振幅 值與以兩位疋列所算出之振幅期待值的差分定量化,藉 此檢測出邊緣的偏移方向與偏移量。與專利文獻1相同, 對應業已對應各圖案之前述邊緣的偏移方向與偏移量,對 由應开少成之記錄記號之記號長與前後之間隔長而分類之適 應性記錄參數進行最佳化。 7 201021037 專利文獻1及專利文獻2係藉PR1221ML方式處理再生 訊號。使用第3圖更進一步說明專利文獻1所揭示之記錄脈 波之控制。 由資訊記錄媒體1所讀出之資訊,係藉光學頭2而轉變 為類比再生訊號。類比再生訊號藉前置放大器部3而被放 大,經AC耦合後輸入至AGC部4。AGC部4則調整振幅,使 後段的波形等化部5的輸出為一定振幅。業經振幅調整之類 比再生訊號藉波形等化部5進行波形整形,輸入至A/D變換 部6。A/D變換部6與由PLL部7輸出之再生時脈同步,對類 比再生訊號進行取樣。PLL部7由在A/D變換部6業經取樣之 數位再生訊號抽出再生時脈。 藉A/D變換部6取樣而產生之數位再生訊號輸入至PR 等化部8。PR等化部8調整數位再生訊號的頻率,使記錄時 及再生時之數位再生訊號的頻率特性為最大概率解碼部9 所假定之特性(例如?尺(1,2,2,1)等化特性)。最大概率解碼部 9對由PR等化部8輸出之業經波形整形之數位再生訊號進行 最大概率解碼,產生2值化訊號。組合PR等化部8及最大概 率解碼部9之再生訊號處理技術為PRML方式。 邊緣移位檢測部10接收來自Pr等化部8之業經波形整 形之數位再生訊號、與由最大概率解碼部9輸出之2值化訊 號。邊緣移位檢測部1〇由2值化訊號判別狀況遷移,由判別 、、、°果與为支度量值(branch metric)尋求解碼結果的可信 度。又,邊緣移位檢測部1〇依據2值化訊號,依記錄記號之 '、冬始知邊緣的各圖案而分配可信度,尋求來自記錄補償參 201021037 數最佳值的偏移(以下,稱之為邊緣移位)。Wave 2 = worry = conventional recording pulse wave control method of interference and thermal interference, for example, Patent 1 and Patent Document 2. Dedicated to the ice to reveal the branch, Qian Hongzheng _ when the exact bit column obtained, and the one of the correct bit column shifts the most easy yarn = record 7 , by calculating the regenerative signal and The Euclidean distance estimation of the two-element column, and the regenerative signal adapted to the equalization, detect the offset direction and offset of the f-edge of each pattern ((10)). Then, corresponding to the offset direction and the offset of the edge of the month corresponding to each pattern, the patent document 2 ' is attached to the coffee-length heart-shaped recording parameter after the long record of the record mark = The edge portion of the positive bit column and the error bit column where the station bit shift occurs, and the difference between the amplitude value of the adaptively mixed reproduced signal and the amplitude expectation value calculated by the two-bit array is quantified. Thereby, the offset direction and the offset of the edge are detected. In the same manner as in Patent Document 1, the offset direction and the offset amount of the edge corresponding to each pattern are matched, and the adaptive recording parameter classified by the length of the mark of the record mark to be opened and the interval between the front and the back is optimized. Chemical. 7 201021037 Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 process a reproduction signal by the PR1221ML method. The control of the recording pulse disclosed in Patent Document 1 will be further explained using Fig. 3. The information read by the information recording medium 1 is converted into an analog reproduction signal by the optical head 2. The analog reproduction signal is amplified by the preamplifier section 3, and is AC-coupled and input to the AGC section 4. The AGC unit 4 adjusts the amplitude so that the output of the waveform equalization unit 5 in the subsequent stage has a constant amplitude. The amplitude-adjusted analog signal is waveform-shaped by the waveform equalization unit 5, and is input to the A/D conversion unit 6. The A/D conversion unit 6 synchronizes the reproduction clock output from the PLL unit 7 to sample the analog reproduction signal. The PLL unit 7 extracts the reproduction clock from the digital reproduction signal sampled by the A/D conversion unit 6. The digital reproduction signal generated by the sampling by the A/D conversion unit 6 is input to the PR equalization unit 8. The PR equalization unit 8 adjusts the frequency of the digital reproduction signal so that the frequency characteristic of the digital reproduction signal at the time of recording and reproduction is the characteristic assumed by the maximum probability decoding unit 9 (for example, the scale (1, 2, 2, 1) is equalized. characteristic). The maximum probability decoding unit 9 performs maximum probability decoding on the waveform-shaped digital reproduced signal output from the PR equalizing unit 8, and generates a binary signal. The reproduced signal processing technique of the combined PR equalization unit 8 and the most approximate rate decoding unit 9 is a PRML method. The edge shift detecting unit 10 receives the digitally reconstructed signal from the Pr equalizing unit 8 and the binary signal which is output from the maximum probability decoding unit 9. The edge shift detecting unit 1 is migrating from the binary signal discrimination state, and the reliability of the decoding result is sought from the discrimination, the value, and the branch metric. Further, the edge shift detecting unit 1 allocates the reliability according to each of the patterns of the record mark ', the winter start edge, and seeks the offset from the record compensation parameter 201021037 based on the binary signal (hereinafter, Called edge shifting).
使用具有預定記錄圖案之資料列進行測試記錄,資訊 §己錄控制部15依從由各圖案邊緣移位量判斷需要改變之資 訊’改變可改變設定之記錄參數。可改變設定之記錄參數 係預先決定者’例如在記錄記號之始端邊緣部為記錄開始 位置偏位dTtop ’在終端邊緣部為記錄終了位置偏位dTs。 例如’資訊記錄控制部15依從第4圖所示之記錄參數表,改 變記錄參數。第4圖顯示的係由記錄記號及前方間隔之長度 所分類之始端邊緣相關之記錄參數、及由記錄記號及前方 間隔之長度所分類之終端邊緣相關之記錄參數。 第4圖中,記錄記號M(i)、前方間隔s(i-l)、後方間隔 S(i+1)各符號,係意指如第5圖所示之記錄記號及間隔的時 間序列。符號Μ表示記錄記號’符號s表示間隔,任意記錄 記號及間隔之時間序列係使用符號i來表示。 如第4圖所示,與已分類之記錄參數對應的記錄記號係 以M(i)表示。如第5圖所示,記錄記號M(i)的前方間隔為 s(i-l) ’更前方的記錄記號為M(i-2),更前方的間隔為 s(i_3);後方間隔為S(i+1),更後方的記錄記號為M(i+2), 更後方的間隔為S(i+3)。The test record is recorded using a data column having a predetermined recording pattern, and the information recording control unit 15 follows the information of the change in the edge of each pattern to determine the information to be changed, and changes the record parameter of the changeable setting. The recording parameter of the changeable setting is, for example, the recording start position offset dTtop ' at the beginning edge portion of the recording mark, and the recording end position offset dTs at the terminal edge portion. For example, the information recording control unit 15 changes the recording parameters in accordance with the recording parameter table shown in Fig. 4. Fig. 4 shows the recording parameters related to the start edge of the classification mark and the length of the front interval, and the recording parameters related to the terminal edge classified by the record mark and the length of the front interval. In Fig. 4, the symbols M(i), the front interval s(i-1), and the rear interval S(i+1) are symbols, which means the time series of the recording marks and intervals as shown in Fig. 5. The symbol Μ indicates the recording symbol ’ symbol s indicates the interval, and the time series of any recording symbol and interval is represented by the symbol i. As shown in Fig. 4, the record marks corresponding to the classified record parameters are represented by M(i). As shown in Fig. 5, the front interval of the recording mark M(i) is s(il) 'The record mark on the front side is M(i-2), the interval on the front side is s(i_3); the space on the back is S ( i+1), the rear record mark is M(i+2), and the rear space is S(i+3).
始端邊緣係位於記錄記號M(i)與前方間隔S(i-1)之間, 如第4圖所示,dTtop值係以對應該等長度組合的圖案而分 類。例如,當前方間隔的長度為3T、記錄記號的長度為4T 時,為圖案3Ts4Tm。終端邊緣係位於記錄記號M(i)與後方 間隔S(i+1)之間,如第4圖所示, dTs值係以對應該等長度組 9 201021037 合的圖案而分類。例如,當記錄記號的長度為3丁、後方間 隔的長度為2T時,為圖案3Tm2Ts。如第4圖所示,始端邊 緣及終端邊緣合計存在32種記錄參數。 資訊記錄控制部15調整例如前方間隔為3T、記錄記號 為4Τ之記錄記號之始端邊緣時,係改變3Ts4Tm之記錄參數 (例如dTtop),調整後方間隔為2丁、記錄記號為3了之記錄記 號之終端邊緣時,係改變3Tm2Ts之記錄參數(例如dTt〇p)。 記錄圖案產生部11係以輸入之應記錄資訊而產生業經 調變之NRZI訊號。記錄補償部12係依據以資訊記錄控制部 15改變之記錄參數,依從NRZI訊號產生記錄脈波列。記錄 功率設定部14係設定峰值功率pp、底值功率扑等各記錄功 率。雷射驅動部13係依從記錄脈波列及記錄功率設定部“ 所設定之記錄功率,控制光學頭2的雷射發光動作。 如此,對資訊記錄媒體i進行測試記錄,可控制記錄脈 波形狀以減少邊緣移位量。從而,可藉由使用pRML方式及 圮錄參數之間隔補償的記錄控制方法,而形成更適合的記 錄記號及間隔。 先前技術文獻 專利文獻 專利文獻1 :特開20〇4_335079號公報 專利文獻2 :特開2008-112509號公報 t 明内】 發明概要 發明欲解決之課題 201021037 如資訊記錄媒體更進-步地高密度化,則瑪間干涉及 SNR劣化將更加成為_。因&,由資訊記錄媒體獲得之 再生訊號必須以更高次的PRML方法來處理。 在如此情形下,為了藉高次的PRML方法適當地再生記 錄於資訊記錄媒體之資訊,需要調整記錄條件,以藉測試 §己錄對記錄記號的邊緣位置作更高精度的調整減少訊號 再生時的錯誤率。 本發明的目的在於提供一種考慮高次的PRML方式,且 可調整s己錄條件以使進行最大概率解碼時的錯誤發生率最 小’並可安定地實現高密度記錄之資訊記錄媒體及記錄再 生裝置。更具體而言,目的在於實現一種更安定之記錄再 生系統,該記錄再生系統係當進行高密度記錄時,可進行 記錄資訊之錯誤率減少之記錄者。 解決課題之手段 本發明之資訊記錄媒體,係包含軌道與記錄條件記錄 區域者’前述軌道記錄由複數記錄記號及分別設於前述複 數5己錄兄號之間的複數間隔所構成的資科列’前述記錄條 牛°己錄區域可記錄用以將前述資料列記錄於軌道的記錄條 件,以包含於前述資料列,且將應依據前述記錄條件形成 :月〗述軌道之記錄記號作為第丨記錄記號的情況下·當前述 第ls己錄6己號的長度較預定長度長時,使用前述第1記錄記 號的長度、與*切接於前述第1記錄記號之前方或後方之 置之第1間隔的長度之組合,分類前述記錄條件;當前述 第1β己錄錢的長度在駭長度町時,使料述第1記錄 11 201021037 記號的長度、前述第1間隔的長度、及位在不鄰接於前述第 1間隔而鄰接於前述第1記錄記號之位置之第2間隔的長度 之組合’分類前述記錄條件。 於較佳實施型態中,别述預定長度係前述資料列之 前述記錄記號的最短長度。 於一較佳實施型態中,前述第丨記錄記號的長度、前述 第1間隔的長度、及前述第2間隔的長度之組合的分類中,The start edge is located between the record mark M(i) and the front interval S(i-1). As shown in Fig. 4, the dTtop values are classified in a pattern corresponding to the combination of equal lengths. For example, when the length of the current square is 3T and the length of the recording mark is 4T, it is a pattern of 3Ts4Tm. The terminal edge is located between the record mark M(i) and the rear interval S(i+1). As shown in Fig. 4, the dTs values are classified according to the pattern corresponding to the equal length group 9 201021037. For example, when the length of the recording mark is 3 butyl and the length of the rear space is 2T, it is a pattern 3Tm2Ts. As shown in Fig. 4, there are 32 kinds of recording parameters in total at the beginning edge and the terminal edge. When the information recording control unit 15 adjusts, for example, the leading edge of the recording mark having the front interval of 3T and the recording symbol of 4Τ, the recording parameter (for example, dTtop) of 3Ts4Tm is changed, and the recording mark having the rear interval of 2 and the recording symbol of 3 is adjusted. At the edge of the terminal, the recording parameters of 3Tm2Ts (for example, dTt〇p) are changed. The recording pattern generating portion 11 generates the NRZI signal which is modulated by the input information to be recorded. The recording compensating unit 12 generates a recording pulse train in accordance with the NRZI signal in accordance with the recording parameters changed by the information recording control unit 15. The recording power setting unit 14 sets each recording power such as the peak power pp and the bottom power. The laser drive unit 13 controls the laser light emission operation of the optical head 2 in accordance with the recording power set by the recording pulse train and the recording power setting unit. Thus, by recording and recording the information recording medium i, the pulse shape can be controlled. In order to reduce the amount of edge shifting, it is possible to form a more suitable recording mark and interval by using the recording control method of the interval compensation of the pRML method and the recording parameters. PRIOR ART DOCUMENT Patent Document Patent Document 1: Special Opening 20〇 Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2008-112509, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference. Because &, the reproduced signal obtained by the information recording medium must be processed by a higher-order PRML method. In this case, in order to properly reproduce the information recorded in the information recording medium by the high-order PRML method, it is necessary to adjust the record. Condition, to test the § record of the edge position of the record mark with a higher precision adjustment to reduce the error rate when the signal is reproduced. The purpose of the present invention is to provide an information recording medium and a recording/reproducing apparatus which can realize high-density recording by setting a high-order PRML method and adjusting the s recording condition to minimize the error occurrence rate when performing maximum probability decoding. More specifically, it is an object of the present invention to realize a more stable recording and reproducing system which is a recorder capable of reducing the error rate of recording information when performing high-density recording. , the track record and the record condition record area. The aforementioned track record consists of a plurality of record marks and a plurality of intervals respectively set between the plurality of recorded numbers. The aforementioned record strip can be recorded. Recording the recording conditions for recording the foregoing data in the track to be included in the above-mentioned data column, and it shall be formed according to the foregoing recording conditions: in the case where the recording mark of the track is described as the second recording mark, when the foregoing ls When the length of the recorded number 6 is longer than the predetermined length, the length of the first recording mark is used, and the length of the first recording mark is The combination of the lengths of the first intervals before or after the first recording mark is used to classify the recording conditions. When the length of the first β recorded money is in the length of the length, the first record 11 201021037 is described. The length, the length of the first interval, and the combination of the lengths of the second intervals adjacent to the first interval and adjacent to the first recording mark are classified as the recording condition. In a preferred embodiment The predetermined length is the shortest length of the record mark in the foregoing data column. In a preferred embodiment, the combination of the length of the second record mark, the length of the first interval, and the length of the second interval In the classification,
前述第1間隔之長度的種類數較前述第2間㉟之長度的種類 數多。 於一較佳實施型態中’前述記錄條件為用以調整前述 第1記^記號之始端邊緣之位置之參數,前述第旧隔係鄰 接於A述第1記錄記號之前方之間隔。 於—較佳實施型態中,前述記錄條件為用以調整前述 記錄找之終端祕聽置之參數,前述第旧隔係鄰 接於前述第1記錄記號之後方之間隔。The number of types of the length of the first interval is larger than the number of types of the length of the second space 35. In a preferred embodiment, the recording condition is a parameter for adjusting the position of the start edge of the first mark, and the old partition is adjacent to the space before the first record mark. In a preferred embodiment, the recording condition is a parameter for adjusting the terminal of the recording, and the old partition is adjacent to the space after the first recording mark.
7明之再线置’係再生上述任_規定之資訊記錄 媒體者’前述資訊記錄媒體包含用以儲存有關前述資訊★己 =之碟片資訊之PIC區域’前述再生裝置具有再生訊號 處理和該再生訊號處理部可實行以下之至少—者.將雷 射光照射讀述PIC區域以再切述碟片資訊、及將雷射光 照射至前述轨道以再生業已依據前述記錄條件而記錄 δίΐ 0 錄條件,而將資料列記錄於前述資訊言 本發明之記錄裝置,係依據記錄於資訊記錄媒體之記 己錄媒體者,前述資 12 201021037 料列係由複數記錄記號及分別設於前述複數記錄記號之間 的複數間隔所構成;前述記錄裝置具有:再生訊號處理部, 係將光束照射至前述資訊記錄媒體,再生前述記錄條件 者’及記錄控制部,係依據前述記錄條件,將資訊記錄於 前述資訊記錄媒體者;以包含於前述資料列,且將應依據 前述記錄條件形成於前述軌道之記錄記號作為第1記錄記 號的情況下:當前述第1記錄記號的長度較預定長度長時, 使用前述第1記錄記號的長度、與位在鄰接於前述第1記錄 記號之前方或後方之位置之第1間隔的長度之組合,分類前 述記錄條件;當前述第1記錄記號的長度在預定長度以下 時,使用前述第1記錄記號的長度、前述第丨間隔的長度、 及位在不鄰接於前述第1間隔而鄰接於前述第丨記錄記號之 位置之第2間隔的長度之組合,分類前述記錄條件。 本發明之評價裝置,係用以評價記錄有記錄參數之資 訊記錄媒體者,該記錄參數係用以記錄資料列,該資料列 係由複數記錄記號及分別設於前述複數記錄記號之間的複 數間隔所構成Μ包含於前述資料列,且將應依據前述記 錄條件形成於前述軌道之記錄記號作為第i記錄記號的情 況下:當前述第1記錄記號的長度較預定長度長時,使用前 述第1記錄記號的長度、與位在鄰接於前述第丨記錄記號之 前方或後方之位置之間隔的長度之組合,分類前述記錄 參數;當前述第1記錄記號的長度在預定長度以下時,使用 前述第1記錄記號的長度、前述第丨間隔的長度、及位在不 鄰接於前述第1間隔而鄰接於前述第丨記錄記號之位置之第 13 201021037 2間隔的長度之組合,分類前述記錄參數;前述評價裝置包 含再生訊號處理部,該再生訊號處理部係從由前述資訊記 錄媒體再生之訊號使用PRML訊號處理方式而產生數位訊 號,且由前述數位訊號解碼2值化訊號,由前述2值化訊號 分別算出最有把握之第1狀態遷移列及第2有把握之第2狀 態遷移列與再生訊號之差,即分別算出差分度量以檢測作 為邊緣移位,依據前述邊緣移位,判定前述資訊記錄媒體 是否滿足預定品質者。 本發明之記錄再生裝置’剌以對藉由上述評價裝i 馨 判定滿足預定品質之資訊記錄媒體,進行再生或記錄之至 少一者。 本發明之資訊記錄媒體,係包含可記錄記錄條件之記 · 錄條件記錄區域,且可記錄由複數記錄記號及分別設㈣ ^ 述複數記錄記號之間的複數間隔所構成之資料列者;前述 記錄條件係依各前述記錄記號的長度而被分類,當前述記 錄條件為用以調整前述記錄記號之始端邊緣的位置之參數 時’依各刚述s己錄記號的長度而被分類之記錄條件之至少' ❹ 者係藉由鄰接於前述記錄記號之後方之後方間隔的長 度在預疋長度以下,或較前述預定長度長,而更分類成2 種,田⑴述„己錄條件為用以調整前述記錄記號之終端邊緣 的位置之參數時,依各前述記錄記號的長度而被分類之記 ,亲條件之至v者,係藉由鄰接於前述記錄記號之前方之 前方間隔的長度在預定長度以下或較前述預定長度長, 而更分類成2種。 14 201021037 本發明之再生裝置,係再生上述資訊記錄媒體者,前 述資訊記錄媒體包含用以儲存有關前述資訊記錄媒體之碟 片資訊之PIC區域;前述再生裝置具有再生訊號處理部,該 再生訊號處理部可實行以下之至少一者:將雷射光照射至 前述PIC區域以再生前述碟片資訊、及將雷射光照射至前述 軌道以再生業已依據前述記錄條件而記錄之資訊。 本發明之記錄裝置,係依據記錄於資訊記錄媒體之記 錄條件,而將資料列記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體者,前述資 ® 料列係由複數記錄記號及分別設於前述複數記錄記號之間 的複數間隔所構成;前述記錄裝置具有:再生訊號處理部, 係將光束照射至前述資訊記錄媒體,再生前述記錄條件 • 者;及記錄控制部,係依據前述記錄條件,將資訊記錄於 v 前述資訊記錄媒體者;前述記錄條件係依各前述記錄記號 的長度而被分類,當前述記錄條件為用以調整前述記錄記 號之始端邊緣的位置之參數時,依各前述記錄記號的長度 而被分類之記錄條件之至少一者,係藉由鄰接於前述記錄 ® 記號之後方之後方間隔的長度在預定長度以下,或較前述 預定長度長,而更分類成2種;當前述記錄條件為用以調整 前述記錄記號之終端邊緣的位置之參數時,依各前述記錄 記號的長度而被分類之記錄條件之至少一者,係藉由鄰接 於前述記錄記號之前方之前方間隔的長度在預定長度以 下,或較前述預定長度長,而更分類成2種。 本發明之評價裝置,係用以評價記錄有記錄參數之資 訊記錄媒體者’該記錄參數係用以記錄資料列,該貢料列 15 201021037 係由複數記錄記號及分別設於前述複數記錄記號之間的複 數間隔所構成;前述記錄參數係依各前述記錄記號的長度 而被分類,當前述記錄條件為用以調整前述記錄記號之始 端邊緣的位置之參數時,依各前述記錄記號的長度而被分 類之記錄條件之至少-者,係藉由鄰接於前述記錄記號之 後方之後方間隔的長度在預定長度以下,或較前述預定長 度長’而更分類成2種;當前述記錄條件為用以調整前述記 錄記號之終端邊緣的位置之參數時,依各前述記錄記號的 長度而被分類之記錄條件之至少—者,係藉由_於前冑 φ §己錄e號之前方之前方間隔的長度在預定長度以下,或較 别述預定長度長,而更分類成2種;前述評價裝置包含再生 訊號處理部’該再生職處卿係從由前述資訊記錄舰 · 再生之Λ號使用PRML訊號處理方式而產生數位訊號,由前 述數位sTL號解碼2值化訊號,由前述2值化訊號分別算出最 有把握之第1狀態遷移列及第2有把握之第2狀態遷移列與 再生訊號之差,即分別算出差分度量以檢測作為邊緣移 位,依據剛述邊緣移位,判定前述資訊記錄媒體是否滿足 參 預定品質者。 本發明之δ己錄再生裝置,係用以對藉由上述評價裝置 判定滿足預定品質之資訊記錄媒體,進行再生或記錄之至 少一者。 本發明之資訊記錄媒體’係包含軌道、及記錄有記錄 條件之PIC區域及記錄有前述記錄條件之前述軌道之蛇行 (wobbling)之至少一者,前述轨道記錄由複數記錄記號及分 16 201021037 別設於前述複數記錄記號之間的複數間隔所構成的資料 列’前述記錄條件係用以將前述資料列記錄於軌道者;前 述記錄條件包含用以調整記錄脈波波形之冷卻脈波的終端 位置之參數,該記錄脈波波形係用以形成前述記錄記號 者’前述參數係使用前述記錄記號的長度、與位在鄰接於 前述記錄記號之前方或後方之位置之間隔的長度之組合而 被分類者。(7) The re-distribution of the information recording medium of the above-mentioned information recording medium includes a PIC area for storing information on the disc information of the aforementioned information. The reproducing apparatus has the regenerative signal processing and the regeneration. The signal processing unit may perform at least the following: scanning the PIC area with the laser light to re-disclose the disc information, and irradiating the laser light to the track to recover the δίΐ 0 recording condition according to the recording condition. Recording the data in the foregoing information. The recording device of the present invention is based on the recorded media recorded on the information recording medium. The resource 12 201021037 is composed of a plurality of record marks and respectively disposed between the plurality of record marks. The recording device includes a regenerative signal processing unit that irradiates a light beam onto the information recording medium, and reproduces the recording condition 'and the recording control unit, and records the information on the information recording medium according to the recording condition. Including the above information, and will be formed in accordance with the aforementioned recording conditions When the track mark of the track is the first record mark, when the length of the first record mark is longer than a predetermined length, the length of the first record mark and the bit position are adjacent to the first record mark or The combination of the lengths of the first intervals at the rear position classifies the recording condition; when the length of the first recording mark is less than or equal to a predetermined length, the length of the first recording mark, the length of the second interval, and the bit are used. The recording condition is classified by a combination of the lengths of the second intervals adjacent to the position of the second recording mark adjacent to the first interval. The evaluation device of the present invention is for evaluating an information recording medium recorded with a recording parameter, wherein the recording parameter is used for recording a data column, wherein the data column is composed of a plurality of record marks and a plurality of numbers respectively set between the plurality of record marks The interval constituting Μ is included in the above-mentioned data column, and the recording mark formed on the track should be the i-th record mark according to the recording condition: when the length of the first record mark is longer than a predetermined length, the foregoing 1 combining the length of the recording mark with the length of the interval between the position adjacent to or behind the aforementioned second recording mark, and classifying the recording parameter; when the length of the first recording mark is less than a predetermined length, the foregoing The length of the first recording mark, the length of the second interval, and the combination of the lengths of the 13th 201021037 2 positions adjacent to the first interval and adjacent to the first recording mark are classified into the recording parameters; The evaluation device includes a regenerative signal processing unit, and the regenerative signal processing unit is derived from the information recording medium The reproduced signal generates a digital signal by using the PRML signal processing method, and the binary signal is decoded by the digital signal, and the first state transition column and the second sure second state are calculated from the binary signal respectively. The difference between the migration column and the reproduced signal is calculated by separately calculating the difference metric to detect the edge shift, and determining whether the information recording medium satisfies the predetermined quality according to the edge shift. The recording and reproducing apparatus of the present invention performs at least one of reproducing or recording an information recording medium that satisfies a predetermined quality by the above-described evaluation device. The information recording medium of the present invention includes a recording and recording condition recording area in which recording conditions can be recorded, and can record a data column composed of a plurality of recording marks and a complex interval between (4) and the plurality of recording marks; The recording condition is classified according to the length of each of the aforementioned recording marks, and when the recording condition is a parameter for adjusting the position of the start edge of the recording mark, the recording condition is classified according to the length of each of the recorded symbols. At least the ' is classified into two types by the length of the space after the adjacent recording mark, and is longer than the predetermined length, and is further classified into two types, and the field (1) describes the condition for use. When the parameter of the position of the terminal edge of the record mark is adjusted, it is classified according to the length of each of the record marks, and the condition of the condition is v, which is predetermined by the length of the space before the preceding record mark. The length is less than or longer than the predetermined length, and is further classified into two types. 14 201021037 The reproducing apparatus of the present invention reproduces the above information recording medium The information recording medium includes a PIC area for storing disc information about the information recording medium; the reproducing apparatus has a regenerative signal processing unit, and the regenerative signal processing unit can perform at least one of: irradiating the laser light to The PIC area reproduces the information of the disc and irradiates the laser light to the track to reproduce information recorded according to the recording condition. The recording apparatus of the present invention records the data according to the recording condition recorded on the information recording medium. The column is recorded in the information recording medium, and the resource column is composed of a plurality of recording marks and a plurality of intervals respectively disposed between the plurality of recording marks; the recording device has a regenerative signal processing unit that irradiates the light beam to The information recording medium reproduces the recording condition and the recording control unit records the information in the information recording medium according to the recording condition; the recording condition is classified according to the length of each of the recording marks. The foregoing recording condition is for adjusting the aforementioned recording mark When the parameter of the position of the end edge is at least one of the recording conditions classified according to the length of each of the recording marks, the length of the space after the adjacent recording mark is a predetermined length or less, or The predetermined length is long and is further classified into two types; when the recording condition is a parameter for adjusting the position of the terminal edge of the recording mark, at least one of the recording conditions classified according to the length of each of the recording marks is The length of the space before the preceding recording mark is less than a predetermined length or longer than the predetermined length, and is further classified into two types. The evaluation device of the present invention is for evaluating the information record in which the recording parameters are recorded. The mediator's record parameter is used to record the data column, and the tribute column 15 201021037 is composed of a plurality of record marks and a plurality of intervals respectively disposed between the plurality of record marks; the foregoing record parameters are according to the foregoing record marks. Classified by length, when the aforementioned recording condition is a parameter for adjusting the position of the leading edge of the aforementioned recording mark At least one of the recording conditions classified according to the length of each of the aforementioned recording marks is further classified into a length shorter than a predetermined length by a length adjacent to the rear of the recording mark or longer than the predetermined length. In the case where the foregoing recording condition is a parameter for adjusting the position of the terminal edge of the aforementioned recording mark, at least the recording condition classified according to the length of each of the foregoing recording marks is by _ preceding 胄 φ § The length before the e-number is less than the predetermined length, or longer than the predetermined length, and is further classified into two types; the evaluation device includes the regenerative signal processing unit' The recording ship and the nickname of the reproduction use the PRML signal processing method to generate a digital signal, and the binary signal is decoded by the digital sTL number, and the first state transition column and the second sureness are calculated from the binary signal respectively. The difference between the second state transition column and the reproduced signal, that is, the difference metric is separately calculated to detect the edge shift, and the information record is determined based on the edge shift just described. Body meets predetermined quality parameters were. The δ recording recording and reproducing apparatus of the present invention is for reproducing or recording at least one information recording medium that satisfies a predetermined quality by the evaluation apparatus. The information recording medium of the present invention includes at least one of a track, a PIC area in which recording conditions are recorded, and a wobbling of the track in which the recording condition is recorded, wherein the track record is composed of a plurality of record marks and points 16 201021037 The data column formed by the complex interval between the plurality of recording marks is used to record the data column in the track; the recording condition includes a terminal position for adjusting the cooling pulse wave of the recorded pulse waveform. a parameter, the recorded pulse waveform is used to form the record mark. The parameter is classified by using a combination of a length of the record mark and a length of a space between a position adjacent to a position before or behind the record mark. By.
本發明之再生裝置,係再生上述資訊記錄媒體者,前 述再生裝置具有再生訊號處理部,該再生訊號處理部可實 行以下之至少一者:將雷射光照射至前述PIC區域以再生前 述碟片資訊、及將雷射光照射至前述軌道以再生業已依據 前述記錄條件而記錄之資訊。 本發明之記錄裝置,係依據業已記錄於資訊記 之記錄條件’而將資料列記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體者,前 V寅;㈣複數錄號及分別設於前述複數記錄記號 之間的複數間隔所構成;前述記錄裝置具有:再生訊號處 理二係料束闕至前述資訊記錄媒體,再生前述記錄 及記錄控制部,係依據前述記錄條件,將資訊記 錄於别述資訊記錄碰者;前述記錄條件包含用 錄脈波波敎冷卻脈波的終端位置 5 β 形係用叫成前述⑽記號者;以錄脈波波 記號的長度'與位在鄰接於前‘=^_前述記錄 位置之間_減種合喊4或後方之 本發明之評價裝置,係用以評價記錄有記錄參數之資 17 201021037 己錄媒體者,該雜參數係肋記錄資㈣,該資料列 係由複數讀找及分顺於前述複數記錄記號之間的複 數門隔所構成,則述si錄條件包含用以調整記錄脈波波形 之:卻脈㈣終端位置之參數,該記錄脈波波形個以形 成刚述5£*錄5己號者’前述參數係使用前述記錄記號的長 度、與位在鄰接於前述記錄記號之前方或後方之位置之間 隔的長度之組合而被分類者;前述評價裝置包含再生訊號 處理部’該再生訊號處理料、從㈣述資訊_媒體再生 之訊號使用PRML訊號處理方式而產生數位訊號,由前述數 位訊號解碼2值化訊號,由前述2值化訊號分別算出最有把 握之第1狀態遷移列及第2有把握之第2狀態遷移列與再生 訊號之差,即分別算出差分度量以檢測作為邊緣移位,依 據前述邊緣移位,判定前述資訊記錄媒體是否滿足預定品 質者。 本發明之記錄再生裝置,係用以對藉由上述評價裝置 判定滿足預定品質之資訊記錄媒體,進行再生或記錄之至 少一者。 本發明之記錄控制裝置,係將資訊記錄於資訊號媒體 者,該記錄控制裝置具有記錄補償參數決定部,該記錄補 償參數決定部係對應記錄之資料列,將記錄條件分類成至 少包含1個記錄記號與1個間隔之各資料圖案者;前述各資 料圖案之記錄條件的分類,係使用包含於前述資料列之第1 記錄記號的長度、與位在鄰接於前述第丨記錄記號之前方或 後方之位置之第1間隔的長度之組合而分類,並依位在不鄰 18 201021037 接於前述第1記錄記號而鄰接於前述第1間隔之位置之第2 記錄記號的長度,而更進一步分類記錄條件,以將資訊記 錄於資訊記錄媒體。 於一較佳實施型態中,依前述第2記錄記號的長度之分 類,僅於前述第1間隔的長度在預定長度以下的情況實施。 於一較佳實施型態中,於前述資料圖案之分類中,依 位在不鄰接於第1記錄記號與第1間隔而鄰接於第2記錄記 號之位置之第2間隔的長度,而更進一步分類。 於一較佳實施型態中,依前述第2間隔的長度之分類, 僅於前述第2記錄記號的長度在前述預定長度以下的情況 實施。 於一較佳實施型態中,前述預定長度係前述資料列之 最短長度。 又,本發明之記錄控制裝置,係將資訊記錄於資訊號 媒體者,該記錄控制裝置具有記錄補償參數決定部,該記 錄補償參數決定部係對應記錄之資料列,將記錄條件分類 成至少包含1個記錄記號與1個間隔之各資料圖案者;前述 各資料圖案之記錄條件的分類,係使用包含於前述資料列 之第1記錄記號的長度、與位在鄰接於前述第1記錄記號之 前方或後方之位置之第1間隔的長度之組合而分類,並依位 在不鄰接於前述第1間隔而鄰接於前述第1記錄記號之位置 之第2間隔的長度,而更進一步分類記錄條件,以將資訊記 錄於資訊記錄媒體。 於一較佳實施型態中,依前述第2間隔的長度之分類, 19 201021037 僅於前述第1記錄記號的長度在預定長度以下的情況實施。 於一較佳實施型態中,於前述資料圖案之分類中,依 位在不鄰接於第1記錄記號與第1間隔而鄰接於第2間隔之 位置之第2記錄記號的長度,而更進一步分類。 於一較佳實施型態中,依前述第2記錄記號的長度之分 類,僅於前述第2間隔的長度在前述預定長度以下的情況實 施。 於一較佳實施型態中,前述預定長度係前述資料列之 最短長度。 鲁 本發明之記錄控制方法,係將資訊記錄於資訊記錄媒 體者’對應記錄之資料列,將記錄條件分類成至少包含1個 記錄記號與1個間隔之各資料圖案;前述各資料圖案之記錄 · 條件的分類,係使用包含於前述資料列之第丨記錄記號的長 · 度、與位在鄰接於前述第1記錄記號之前方或後方之位置之 第1間隔的長度之組合而分類,並依位在不鄰接於前述第1 記錄記號而鄰接於前述第丨間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長 度’而更進一步分類記錄條件,以將資訊記錄於資訊記錄 Φ 媒體。 於一較佳實施型態中,依前述第2記錄記號的長度之分 類’僅於前述第1間隔的長度在預定長度以下的情況實施。 於一較佳實施型態中,於前述資料圖案之分類中,依 位在不鄰接於第1記錄記號與第1間隔而鄰接於第2記錄記 號之位置之第2間隔的長度,而更進一步分類。 於一較佳實施型態中,依前述第2間隔的長度之分類, 20 201021037 僅於前述第2記錄記號的長度在前述預定長度以下的情況 實施。 於一較佳實施型態中,前述預定長度係前述資料列之 最短長度。 又,本發明之記錄控制方法,係將資訊記錄於資訊號 媒體者,對應記錄之資料列’將記錄條件分類成至少包含1 個記錄記號與1個間隔之各資料圖案;前述各資料圖案之記 錄條件的分類,係使用包含於前述資料列之第1記錄記號的 長度、與位在鄰接於前述第1記錄記號之前方或後方之位置 之第1間隔的長度之組合而分類,並依位在不鄰接於前述第 1間隔而鄰接於前述第1記錄記號之位置之第2間隔的長 度,而更進一步分類記錄條件’以將資訊記錄於資訊記錄 媒體。 於一較佳實施型態中,依前述第2間隔的長度之分類, 僅於前述第1記錄記號的長度在預定長度以下的情況實施。 於一較佳實施型態中,於前述資料圖案之分類中,依 位在不鄰接於第1記錄記號與第1間隔而鄰接於第2間隔之 位置之第2記錄記號的長度,而更進一步分類記錄條件。 於一較佳實施型態中,依前述第2記錄記號的長度之分 類,僅於前述第2間隔的長度在前述預定長度以下的情況實 施。 於-較佳實施型態中,前述預定長度係前述資料列之 最短長度。 本發月之„己錄再生裝置,係包含再生訊號處理部與記 21 201021037 錄控制部者,該再生訊號處理部係從由資訊記錄媒體再生 之訊號使用PRML訊號處理方式而產生數位訊號及解碼2值 化訊號,該記錄控制部係依據前述數位訊號及2值化訊號, 調整用以將資訊記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體之記錄參數,將 前述資sfl記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體;前述記錄控制部包含 記錄補償參數決定部,該記錄補償參數決定部係對應記錄 之資料列,將記錄條件分類成至少包含丨個記錄記號與1個 間隔之各資料圖案;前述各資料圖案之記錄條件的分類, 係使用包含於前述資料列之第丨記錄記號的長度、與位在鄰 〇 接於剛述第1記錄記號之前方或後方之位置之第丨間隔的長 度之組合而分類,並依位在不鄰接於前述第丨記錄記號而鄰 接於前述第1間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長度,而更進一 · 步分類記錄條件,以將資訊記錄於資訊記錄媒體。 “ 又,本發明之記錄再生裝置,係包含再生訊號處理部 與。己錄控制部者,該再生訊號處理部係從由資訊記錄媒體 再生之訊號使用PRML sfl號處理方式而產生數位訊號及解 碼2值化訊號’該記錄控制部係依據前述數位訊號及2值化 φ 讯號,調整用以將資訊記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體之記錄參 數,將前述資訊記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體;前述記錄控制 部包含記錄補償參數決定部,該記錄補償參數決定部係對 應記錄之資料列’將記錄條件分類成至少包含1個記錄記號 與1個間隔之各資料圖案;前述各資料圖案之記錄條件的分 類,係使用包含於前述資料列之第丨記錄記號的長度、與位 在鄰接於前述第1記錄記號之前方或後方之位置之第丨間隔 22 201021037 的長度之組合而分類,並依位在不鄰接於前述第1間隔而鄰 接於前述第1記錄記號之位置之第2_的長度,而更進一 步分類記錄條件,以將資訊記錄於資訊記錄媒體。 於一較佳實施型態中,前述再生訊號處理部具有邊緣 移位檢測部’該邊緣移位檢測部係由前述2值化訊號算出最 有把握之第1狀態遷移列及第2有把握之第2狀態遷移列與 再生訊號之差,即算出差分度量,並依據前述2值化訊號,In the reproduction device of the present invention, the information recording medium is reproduced, wherein the reproduction device includes a reproduction signal processing unit, and the reproduction signal processing unit can perform at least one of: irradiating laser light to the PIC area to reproduce the information of the disk. And irradiating the laser light to the aforementioned track to reproduce information that has been recorded in accordance with the aforementioned recording conditions. The recording device of the present invention records the data in the information recording medium according to the recording condition that has been recorded in the information record, the first V寅; (4) the plural number and the plural interval respectively set between the plurality of record marks The recording device includes: a regenerative signal processing second processing bundle to the information recording medium, and the reproduction of the recording and recording control unit, wherein the information is recorded in a different information recording contact according to the recording condition; the recording condition The terminal position including the recording pulse wave 敎 cooling pulse wave 5 β is used to call the above (10) mark; the length of the recorded pulse wave sign 'and the position adjacent to the front '=^_ the aforementioned recording position _ The evaluation device of the invention of the invention is used to evaluate the recording of the recorded parameters. The data is recorded by the media. The data is recorded by the plural number of readings and records. Between the complex gates between the plurality of record marks, the si record condition includes a parameter for adjusting the position of the pulse wave (four) terminal position, the record pulse The waveforms are formed by a combination of the length of the aforementioned recording mark and the length of the space between the position adjacent to or before the recording mark in the case where the waveform is formed as follows: The evaluation device includes a regenerative signal processing unit, the regenerative signal processing material, and a digital signal generated by the PRMS signal processing method from the (4) information/media reproduction signal, and the binary signal is decoded by the digital signal, and the binary signal is generated by the digital signal. Calculating the difference between the most confident first state transition column and the second sure second state transition column and the reproduced signal, that is, separately calculating the difference metric to detect the edge shift, and determining the information record according to the edge shift. Whether the media meets the predetermined quality. The recording and reproducing apparatus of the present invention is for reproducing or recording at least one information recording medium that satisfies a predetermined quality by the evaluation device. The recording control device of the present invention records information on the information number media, and the recording control device has a recording compensation parameter determining unit that classifies the recording condition into at least one recording unit corresponding to the recorded data column. Recording the symbol and each of the data patterns of the interval; the classification of the recording conditions of the data patterns is to use the length of the first recording mark included in the data column, and the bit position is adjacent to the first recording mark or The length of the first interval is classified by the combination of the lengths of the first intervals, and is further classified according to the length of the second recording mark adjacent to the position of the first interval, which is adjacent to the first recording mark 18 201021037. Record conditions to record information on the information recording media. In a preferred embodiment, the length of the second recording mark is performed only when the length of the first interval is less than or equal to a predetermined length. In a preferred embodiment, in the classification of the data pattern, the length of the second interval adjacent to the position of the second recording mark is not adjacent to the first recording mark and the first interval, and further classification. In a preferred embodiment, the classification of the length of the second interval is performed only when the length of the second recording mark is equal to or less than the predetermined length. In a preferred embodiment, the predetermined length is the shortest length of the aforementioned data. Further, the recording control device of the present invention records information on the information number media, and the recording control device includes a recording compensation parameter determining unit that classifies the recording condition into at least the recording data column corresponding to the record. a record symbol and a data pattern of one interval; the classification of the recording conditions of the data patterns is performed by using the length of the first record symbol included in the data column and the bit position adjacent to the first record mark The length of the first interval of the position of the square or the rear is classified, and the recording condition is further classified according to the length of the second interval adjacent to the position of the first recording mark that is not adjacent to the first interval. To record information on the information recording media. In a preferred embodiment, according to the classification of the length of the second interval, 19 201021037 is performed only when the length of the first recording mark is less than or equal to a predetermined length. In a preferred embodiment, in the classification of the data pattern, the length of the second recording mark adjacent to the second interval is not adjacent to the first recording mark and the first interval, and further classification. In a preferred embodiment, the length of the second recording mark is performed only when the length of the second interval is less than the predetermined length. In a preferred embodiment, the predetermined length is the shortest length of the aforementioned data. The recording control method of Luben's invention records the information in the data record media's corresponding record data column, and classifies the recording condition into a data pattern containing at least one record mark and one interval; the record of each of the foregoing data patterns The classification of the condition is classified by using a combination of the length of the third record included in the data column and the length of the first interval adjacent to the position before or after the first record mark, and The recording condition is further classified according to the length 'the length of the second recording mark adjacent to the first recording mark adjacent to the first recording mark to record the information on the information recording Φ medium. In a preferred embodiment, the classification of the length of the second recording mark is performed only when the length of the first interval is less than or equal to a predetermined length. In a preferred embodiment, in the classification of the data pattern, the length of the second interval adjacent to the position of the second recording mark is not adjacent to the first recording mark and the first interval, and further classification. In a preferred embodiment, according to the classification of the length of the second interval, 20 201021037 is implemented only when the length of the second recording mark is less than or equal to the predetermined length. In a preferred embodiment, the predetermined length is the shortest length of the aforementioned data. Moreover, the recording control method of the present invention records the information in the information number media, and classifies the recording condition into a data pattern including at least one recording mark and one interval; the foregoing data patterns The classification of the recording condition is classified by using the combination of the length of the first recording symbol included in the data column and the length of the first interval adjacent to the position before or after the first recording symbol, and is classified. The length of the second interval adjacent to the position of the first recording mark is not adjacent to the first interval, and the recording condition 'is further classified to record information on the information recording medium. In a preferred embodiment, the classification of the length of the second interval is performed only when the length of the first recording mark is less than or equal to a predetermined length. In a preferred embodiment, in the classification of the data pattern, the length of the second recording mark adjacent to the second interval is not adjacent to the first recording mark and the first interval, and further Classification record conditions. In a preferred embodiment, the length of the second recording mark is performed only when the length of the second interval is less than the predetermined length. In a preferred embodiment, the predetermined length is the shortest length of the foregoing data. The recording and reproducing device of the present month includes a regenerative signal processing unit and a recording control unit. The regenerative signal processing unit generates a digital signal and decodes using a PRML signal processing method from a signal reproduced by the information recording medium. a recording signal control unit that adjusts a recording parameter for recording information on the information recording medium according to the digital signal and the binary signal, and records the resource sfl in the information recording medium; the recording control unit And including a recording compensation parameter determining unit that classifies the recording condition into a data pattern including at least one recording mark and one interval; and classifying the recording conditions of the respective data patterns, Use the combination of the length of the 丨 record mark included in the above data column and the length of the 丨 interval between the position adjacent to the position immediately before or after the first record mark, and the position is not a length adjacent to the second recording mark adjacent to the first recording mark and adjacent to the position of the first interval, and further · A step of classifications of recording conditions to recording information on the information recording medium. "Further, the recording reproducing apparatus of the present invention, comprising a reproducing system signal processing portion. In the recorded control unit, the regenerative signal processing unit generates a digital signal and decodes the binary signal from the signal reproduced by the information recording medium using the PRML sfl processing method. The recording control unit is based on the digital signal and binarization. a φ signal for adjusting a recording parameter for recording information on the information recording medium, and recording the information on the information recording medium; the recording control unit includes a recording compensation parameter determining unit, and the recording compensation parameter determining unit is corresponding to the recording The data column 'classifies the recording condition into a data pattern including at least one record mark and one space; the classification of the record conditions of the above data patterns uses the length and bit position of the record mark included in the foregoing data column. Classification is performed in combination with the length of the second interval 22 201021037 adjacent to the position before or after the first recording mark, and is adjacent to the position adjacent to the first recording mark not adjacent to the first interval The length of 2_, and further classify the recording conditions to record information on the information recording medium. In a preferred embodiment, the reproduced signal processing unit includes an edge shift detecting unit. The edge shift detecting unit calculates the first state transition column and the second sureness from the binary signal. The difference between the second state transition column and the reproduced signal, that is, the difference metric is calculated, and according to the aforementioned binary signal,
依記錄記號的始終端邊緣之㈣案而分配前述差分度量, 對應各圖鱗求來自記錄參數之最佳值之邊緣移位者;且 前述再生職纽侧歸軌錄參數,錢前述邊緣移 位接近預定目標值。 於-較佳實施型態中,前述記錄補償參數決定部之資 料圖案分類與前述邊緣移位檢測部之圖案分類相同。 本發明之記錄再生方法係包含再生訊號處理步驟與記 錄控制步驟者,該再生訊號處理步驟魏由資訊記錄媒體 再生之訊號制PRML訊號處理方式而產生數位訊號及解 碼2值化職’魏錄㈣步驟缝騎述數㈣號及⑽ 化訊號’調整用以將資訊記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體之記錄 參數,將前述資觀錄於前料觀錄㈣;前述記錄控 制步驟包含記_償參數決定步驟,觀制償參數決定 步驟係對應記錄之資料列,將記錄條件分誠至少包含_ 記錄記號與1個間隔之各資料圖案;前述各資料圖案之記錄 條件的分類,係、使用包含於前述資料列之第Η己錄記號的長 度、與位在鄰接於前述輯己錄記號之前方紐方之位置之 23 201021037 第1間隔的長度之組合而分類,並依位在不鄰接於前述第i 記錄記號而鄰接於前述第1間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長 度,而更進-步分類記錄條件’以將資訊記錄於資訊記錄 媒體。 又’本發明之記錄再生方法係包含再生訊號處理步驟 與記錄控制步驟者,該再生訊號處理步驟係從由資訊記錄 媒體再生之訊號使用PRML訊號處理方式而產生數位訊號 及解碼2值化訊號,該記錄控制步驟係依據前述數位訊號及 2值化訊號,調整用以將資訊記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體之記 參 錄參數,將前述資訊記錄於前述資訊記錄媒體;前述記錄 控制步驟包含記錄補償參數決定步驟,該記錄補償參數決 定步驟係對應記錄之資料列,將記錄條件分類成至少包含丨 , 個記錄記號與1個間隔之各資料圖案;前述各資料圖案之記 · 錄條件的分類,係使用包含於前述資料列之第i記錄記號的 長度、與位在鄰接於前述第丨記錄記號之前方或後方之位置 之第1間隔的長度之組合而分類,並依位在不鄰接於前述第 1間隔而鄰接於前述第1記錄記號之位置之第2間隔的長 〇 度,而更進一步分類記錄條件,以將資訊記錄於資訊記錄 媒體。 於一較佳實施型態中,前述再生訊號處理步驟具有邊 緣移位檢測步驟,該邊緣移位檢測步驟係由前述2值化訊號 算出最有把握之第1狀態遷移列及第2有把握之第2狀態遷 移列與再生訊號之差,即算丨差分度I,並依據前述2值化 訊號,依圯錄s己號的始終端邊緣之各圖案分配前述差分度 24 201021037 量,對應各圖案尋求來自記錄參數之最佳值之邊緣移位 者;且前述再生訊號處理步驟調整前述記錄參數,以使前 述邊緣移位接近預定目標值。 於一較佳實施螌態中,前述記錄補償參數決定步驟之 資料圖案分類與前述邊緣移位檢測步驟之圖案分類相同。 發明效果 本發明係使用作為記錄對象之記錄記號的長度及鄰接 於如方或後方之間隔的長度的組合,來分類用於將資料列 ® 記錄於軌道之記錄條件,當作為記錄對象之記錄記號的長 度在預定長度以下時,鄰接於後方或前方之間隔長度亦被 使用來分類。因此,即使記錄記號微小化、資訊記錄媒體 * 的記錄密度變高,亦可考慮形成記錄記號時的熱影響,更 , 高精度地將具有適當形狀之記錄記號記錄於適當位置。 從而’藉由利用本發明來調整記錄條件,可提供一種 更女疋之S己錄再生系統,該記錄再生系統係可對需要高次 PRML方式之禹密度記錄進行記錄資訊之錯誤率減少之記 參 錄者。The foregoing difference metric is allocated according to the (4) case of the always-end edge of the record mark, and the edge shifter from the optimum value of the record parameter is obtained corresponding to each figure scale; and the aforementioned regenerative job side is attributed to the track record parameter, and the aforementioned edge shift is performed. Close to the predetermined target value. In the preferred embodiment, the data pattern classification of the recording compensation parameter determining unit is the same as the pattern classification of the edge shift detecting unit. The recording and reproducing method of the present invention comprises a regenerative signal processing step and a recording control step, wherein the regenerative signal processing step generates a digital signal and decodes a binary value by a signal-based PRML signal processing method reproduced by the information recording medium. The step of sewing (4) and (10) the signal 'adjustment' is used to record the information on the recording parameters of the information recording medium, and record the foregoing information in the pre-recording (4); the foregoing recording control step includes the step of determining the parameter The decision-making parameter determining step is a data column corresponding to the record, and the record condition is divided into at least the data pattern of the _ record mark and the one interval; the classification of the record conditions of the foregoing data patterns is used and used in the foregoing data. The length of the first recorded number of the column is classified according to the combination of the length of the first interval of 23 201021037 adjacent to the position of the adjacent recording number, and is not adjacent to the aforementioned i-th record. Marking the length of the second recording mark adjacent to the position of the first interval, and further classifying the recording condition 'to record the information in the capital Recording media. Further, the recording and reproducing method of the present invention includes a regenerative signal processing step and a recording control step, wherein the regenerative signal processing step generates a digital signal and decodes the binary signal by using a PRML signal processing method from the signal reproduced by the information recording medium. The recording control step adjusts the recording parameters for recording information on the information recording medium according to the foregoing digital signal and the binary signal, and records the information on the information recording medium; the recording control step includes recording compensation parameters. a determining step, wherein the recording compensation parameter determining step is to classify the recording condition into a data pattern including at least one of a record mark and an interval; and the classification of the record conditions of each of the data patterns is Classification is performed using a combination of the length of the i-th record symbol included in the data column and the length of the first interval adjacent to the position before or after the second record mark, and is not adjacent to the foregoing 1 long interval of the second interval adjacent to the position of the first recording mark And further classify the recording conditions to record information on the information recording medium. In a preferred embodiment, the regenerative signal processing step has an edge shift detecting step for calculating the most confident first state transition column and the second sureness from the binary signal. The difference between the second state transition column and the reproduced signal, that is, the difference degree I, and according to the above-mentioned binary signal, the difference degree 24 201021037 is allocated according to each pattern of the always-end edge of the recorded number, corresponding to each pattern An edge shifter from the optimum value of the recorded parameter is sought; and the aforementioned reproduced signal processing step adjusts the aforementioned recording parameter such that the aforementioned edge shift approaches a predetermined target value. In a preferred embodiment, the data pattern classification of the recording compensation parameter determining step is the same as the pattern classification of the edge shift detecting step. Advantageous Effects of Invention The present invention classifies a recording condition for recording a data column® on a track using a combination of a length of a recording mark as a recording target and a length adjacent to the square or the rear, and is used as a recording mark of the recording target. When the length is below a predetermined length, the length of the interval adjacent to the rear or the front is also used to classify. Therefore, even if the recording mark is miniaturized and the recording density of the information recording medium * becomes high, the thermal influence at the time of forming the recording mark can be considered, and the recording mark having an appropriate shape can be recorded at an appropriate position with high precision. Therefore, by using the present invention to adjust the recording conditions, it is possible to provide a more child-friendly S-recording reproduction system which can reduce the error rate of recording information for the density recording of the high-order PRML mode. Participant.
【實施方式:J 用以實施發明之型態 以下,一面參考圖面一面說明本發明之實施型態。 本發月為了提南 己錄媒體的記錄密度,藉由減慢 雷射光束之掃插速度,亦即藉由減慢線速度,使記錄記號 及間隔縮短。如此,例如,例如,在12cm的光碟中,可使 資訊記錄層約每層25GB的記憶容量提高至33 3GB。 25 201021037 又,本發明為了由再生訊號的波形選擇最有把握的訊 號序列’採用更高次的prml方式。具體而言,以 PR12221ML方式處理,再生記錄於資訊記錄媒體之資訊。 採用高次PRML方式時,再生訊號的評價方法亦必須為 更高度者。這是因為,如資訊記錄媒體高密度化,會出現 較檢測系統的鑑別限度更短之記錄記號與間隔,資訊記錄 媒體的記錄品質必須要考慮的不僅是記錄記號及間隔的位 置偏移,亦須考慮記錄記號本身的位置偏移、間隔本身的 位置偏移、及將至少各1個以上的記錄記號與間隔之組合作 參 為一組的位置偏移。該等偏移中,可檢測出包含複數邊緣 之圖案。例如,在記錄記號本身的位置偏移中,由於記錄 記號的始端及終端之兩鄰存在間隔,所以會同時檢測出始 · 端邊緣與終端邊緣。又,如將記錄記號A-間隔B般的記號與 間隔各1個的組合作為一組位置偏移,由於間隔A-記號A-間隔B-記號B與個別之相鄰處更存在各〗個間隔與記號’所 以全部可檢測出3個邊緣。 習知之PR1221ML方式為了評價再生訊號的邊緣位 © 置,考慮評價檢測出1個邊緣之情形的記錄品質; PR12221ML方式則如前述所示,需要評價檢測出包含複數 邊緣偏移之圖案時的記錄品質。本發明係以與本申請案相 同受讓人之美國專利申請案11/964825及國際公開第 2008/081820A1 號小冊子所揭示之 MLSE(Maximum Likelihood Sequence Error)作為指標,評價再生訊號之邊緣 位置。美國專利申請案11/964825之全部揭示在此引用作為 26 201021037 參考。 首先,參考第6圖及第7圖,簡單地說明PR12221ML。 第6圖係顯示由rll(1,7)記錄碼與等化方式PR(1,2,2,2,1)K 決定之狀態遷移規則之圖。第7圖係顯示對應第6圖之狀態 遷移規則之格子圖。 藉由PR12221ML與RLL(1,7)之組合,解碼部的狀態數 被限制在10,其狀態遷移數為16,再生位準為9位準。 參考如第6圖所示之PR12221ML之狀態遷移規則,將某 時刻之狀態S(0,0,0,0)表記成S0,S(0,〇,〇,l)表記成S1, S(〇,〇,l,l)表記成S2,S(0,1,1,1)表記成S3,S(l,l,l,l)表記成 S4,S(1,1,1,0)表記成S5,S(l,l,〇,〇)表記成S6,S(1,0,0,0)表 記成S7,S(1,0,0,1)表記成S8,S(〇,l,1,0)表記成S9,表現 10 狀態。在此,括號中所記載之”0”或”1”係顯示時間軸上之 訊號序列,顯示由某狀態之下一時刻的狀態遷移係變為何 種狀態之可能性。又,將該狀態遷移圖沿著時間軸展開可 得到第7圖所顯示之格子圖。 在第7圖所顯示之PR12221ML之狀態遷移中,由某時刻 之預定狀態遷移至另一時刻之預定狀態時,可選擇2個狀態 遷移之狀態遷移圖案(狀態之組合)有無數個。然而,引起錯 誤之可能性高的圖案,係限定於難以判別之特定圖案。若 著眼於此特別容易發生錯誤之圖案,可將PR12221ML的狀 態遷移列圖案整理成如第8圖、第9圖、及第10圖所示。 第8圖至第1〇圖之第1行係表示容易發生錯誤之2個狀 態遷移分歧再會合之狀態遷移(Smk.9— Silk)。 27 201021037 第2行係表示發生該狀態遷移之遷移資料列(bki ... W遷移資料列中的X係表示該等資料中產生錯誤之可能 性:的位^當判定該狀態遷移錯誤時,該X 即為錯誤數量。在遷移資料列中,x變為阳之其中一邊對 =Γ广狀態遷移列,另一邊對應第2有把握之第2 圖及第1G圖中,!Χ係表示Χ的位元反轉。 藉與該遷移資料列作比較(χ的部份不在 比解碼部所解調之解織料财,㈣容易錯誤的最有把[Embodiment: J. Mode for Carrying Out the Invention Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In order to slow down the scanning speed of the laser beam, the recording mark and the interval are shortened by slowing down the line speed in order to reduce the recording density of the recorded media. Thus, for example, in a 12 cm optical disc, the information recording layer can be increased to about 33 GB by about 25 GB per layer. 25 201021037 Moreover, the present invention employs a higher order prml method in order to select the most reliable signal sequence from the waveform of the reproduced signal. Specifically, it is processed in the PR12221ML mode to reproduce information recorded on the information recording medium. When using the high-order PRML method, the evaluation method of the reproduced signal must also be higher. This is because, if the information recording medium is densified, there will be recording marks and intervals that are shorter than the detection limit of the detection system. The recording quality of the information recording medium must take into consideration not only the positional deviation of the recording marks and the intervals, but also The positional offset of the recording mark itself, the positional shift of the space itself, and the positional offset of a group of at least one or more recording marks and spaces must be considered. In these offsets, a pattern containing a plurality of edges can be detected. For example, in the positional offset of the record mark itself, since the beginning of the record mark and the two neighbors of the terminal have an interval, the start end edge and the terminal edge are simultaneously detected. Further, if the combination of the symbol A and the interval B is set as a set of positional offsets, the interval A-symbol A-interval B-symbol B and each of the adjacent portions are more present. The interval and the mark 'so all three edges can be detected. In the conventional PR1221ML method, in order to evaluate the edge position of the reproduced signal, it is considered to evaluate the recording quality in the case where one edge is detected. In the PR12221ML method, as described above, it is necessary to evaluate the recording quality when the pattern including the complex edge offset is detected. . The present invention evaluates the edge position of the reproduced signal by using the MLSE (Maximum Likelihood Sequence Error) disclosed in the pamphlet of the U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 11/964,825 and the International Publication No. 2008/081820 A1. The entire disclosure of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 11/964, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. First, referring to Figures 6 and 7, the PR12221ML will be briefly explained. Fig. 6 is a diagram showing state transition rules determined by the rll (1, 7) recording code and the equalization mode PR (1, 2, 2, 2, 1) K. Fig. 7 is a diagram showing a grid pattern corresponding to the state transition rule of Fig. 6. With the combination of PR12221ML and RLL (1, 7), the number of states of the decoding unit is limited to 10, the number of state transitions is 16, and the reproduction level is 9 bits. Referring to the state transition rule of PR12221ML as shown in Fig. 6, the state S(0, 0, 0, 0) at a certain moment is recorded as S0, and S(0, 〇, 〇, l) is expressed as S1, S (〇) , 〇, l, l) table is recorded as S2, S (0, 1, 1, 1) is recorded as S3, S (l, l, l, l) is recorded as S4, S (1, 1, 1, 0) S5, S (l, l, 〇, 〇) is expressed as S6, S (1, 0, 0, 0) is expressed as S7, S (1, 0, 0, 1) is expressed as S8, S (〇, l , 1, 0) is recorded as S9, showing 10 states. Here, the "0" or "1" described in parentheses shows a sequence of signals on the time axis, showing the possibility of a state transition from a state under a certain state. Further, the state transition diagram is developed along the time axis to obtain the lattice map shown in Fig. 7. In the state transition of the PR12221ML shown in Fig. 7, when the predetermined state at a certain time is shifted to the predetermined state at the other time, there are an infinite number of state transition patterns (combinations of states) that can be selected for the two state transitions. However, a pattern that is highly likely to cause an error is limited to a specific pattern that is difficult to discriminate. If the pattern of the error is particularly likely to occur, the state transition column pattern of the PR12221ML can be arranged as shown in Figs. 8, 9, and 10. The first line from Fig. 8 to Fig. 1 shows the state transition (Smk.9-Silver) in which two states are prone to error and rejoin. 27 201021037 The second line indicates the migration data column in which the state transition occurred (the X in the migration data column indicates the possibility of an error in the data: the bit ^ when determining the state migration error, The X is the number of errors. In the migration data column, x becomes one of the positive pairs, and the other side corresponds to the second and the second figure, which is the second figure. Bit reversal. Compare with the migration data (the part of the 不在 is not decomposed by the decoding department, (4) is the most error-prone
握之第1狀遷移列與第2有把握之第2狀態遷移列。 第3行係表示第1狀態遷移列及第2狀態遷移列。The first state transition column and the second second state transition column are grasped. The third line indicates the first state transition column and the second state transition column.
第4行係表示經過各狀態遷移之2個理想再生波形(pR 等價理想值)’第5行係表示該2個理想訊號的歐氏距離之平 方(路徑間的歐氏距離)。 第8圖係表示可選擇2個狀態遷移之狀態遷移圖案,且 該狀態遷卵案之歐氏距_平方為14,有18_。該等The fourth line indicates the two ideal reproduction waveforms (pR equivalent ideal values) that have undergone each state transition. The fifth line indicates the square of the Euclidean distance (the Euclidean distance between the paths) of the two ideal signals. Fig. 8 shows a state transition pattern in which two state transitions can be selected, and the Euclidean distance _ square of the state egg transfer case is 14, with 18_. Such
赚細私_部份(記錄記號 ==、端邊緣)。換言之’係邊緣之丨位元移位錯 至二=:明第7圖所示之狀態遷移規則娜 遷移成” 於此情形下,可檢測出記錄序列 再生資料的,,〇,,,,°,一^ 長度的間隔、取代”1”’則對應,隔以上 丄=己號、2Τ間隔以上長度。 第11圖係顯示第8圖所示之記錄序列之pR等化理想波 28 201021037 ==Γ8圖所示之記錄序列之。r等化理想波形 乍為第u圖之A路徑波形。同樣地 圖所示之叹等化理想波形之-例的圖。^顯不第9 圖第13圖係顯不第1〇 圖所不之哎等化縣波形之 在第11圖、第12圖、及第13圖中 間(,每1時刻之取樣),_係顯示==時Earn a fine private _ part (record mark ==, end edge). In other words, the position of the edge of the line is shifted to the second =: the state transition rule shown in Fig. 7 is migrated to "in this case, the record sequence reproduction data can be detected, 〇,,,, ° The interval of the length of one ^, the replacement of "1"' corresponds to the length of the interval above 丄 = hex, 2 Τ. The 11th figure shows the pR equalization ideal wave of the recording sequence shown in Fig. 8 201021037 == The recording sequence shown in Fig. 8 is the same as the waveform of the A path of the u-th image. The same as the map of the sigh equalization ideal waveform shown in the same figure. In the middle of the 11th, 12th, and 13th (sampling at 1st time), the _ system shows ==
在第7圖所示之狀態遷移規則中,由 狀態遷移路徑的另-路徑之記錄序列之Π 為M,o,g,g,i,i,(),(),,,如想像以間隔部分取代再生資料 的”0”、以記號部分取代”r’,職應5T_以上長度的間 隔、2Τ記號、2Τ間隔以上長度。 該路徑之PR等價理想波形在第u圖中,係顯示作為Β 路徑波形。第8圖所示之歐氏距離為14的圖案之特徵,係必 定包含有1個邊緣資訊。 第9圖係表示歐氏距離的平方為12之狀態遷移圖案,有 18種類。該等圖案,係有關2T記號或2T間隔之移位錯誤, 係2位元錯誤之圖案。 作為一例,說明第7圖所示之狀態遷移規則之由s 〇 (k_ 7 > 至SO (k)之狀態遷移路徑。於此情形下’可檢測出記錄序列 遷移成”〇,〇,〇,〇,1,1,0,0,0,0,〇”之1路徑’如想像以間隔部分取 代再生資料的”〇”、以記號部分取代”1”,則對應4T間隔以 上長度的間隔、2T記號、5T間隔以上長度。該路徑之PR等 29 201021037 價理想波形在第I2®顯示料鱗徑波形。 另-路徑之記錄序列之遷移為’’oooomoooo”, 如想像以間隔部分取代再生資料的”G”、以記號部分# 代1,’則對應5T間隔以上長度的間隔、2T記號、4T間隔以 上長度。該路徑之PR等價理想波形在第12圖係顯示作為Β 路從波形。第9圖所示之歐氏距離為12的圖案之特徵係必 疋包含有2丁之上升邊及下降邊之2個邊緣資訊。 第10圖係表示另—種類的歐氏距離的平方為12之狀態 遷移列圖案,有18種類。該等圖案’係有關2Τ記號與奵間 鬱 隔之連續部份,係3位元錯誤之圖案。 作為一例,說明第7圖所示之狀態遷移規則之由s〇(k_9) 至S6(k)之狀態遷移路徑。於此情形下,可檢測出記錄序列 , 遷移成"OAOAUO’Oimoki路徑,如想像以間隔部 , 分取代再生資料的,’〇”、以記號部分取代”Γ,,則對應4丁間 隔以上長度的間隔、2Τ記號、2Τ間隔、3Τ記號、2Τ間隔以 上長度。該路徑之PR等價理想波形在第13圖顯示作為Α路 徑波形。 0 另一路徑之記錄序列之遷移 為”0,0,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1,0,0,,,如想像以間隔部分取代再生資 料的以記號部分取代”Γ,,則對應订間隔以上長度的 間隔、2T記號、2T間隔、2T記號、2T間隔以上長度。該路 徑之PR等價理想波形在第13圖顯示作為3路徑波形。第ι〇 圖所示之歐氏距離為12的圖案之特徵,係至少包含有3個邊 緣資訊。 30 201021037 第14圖顯示使用PRl 2221 ML方式處理再生訊號之情形 下之評價再生訊號品質之訊號評價裝置之構成。再生訊號 的品質係由記錄記號的邊緣位置來進行評價。在第14圖之 訊號評價裝置中,與第3圖之記錄控制裝置相同之構成要素 係賦予相同之參考符號,且省略相同之說明。又,記錄碼 為 RLL(1,7)碼之RLL(Run Length Limited)碼。 在第14圖中,邊緣移位檢測部1 〇包含檢測對應第$圖 (14圖案)、第9圖(12A圖案)、第10圖(12B圖案)之圖案之14 圖案檢測部7(Π、12A圖案檢測部704、12B圖案檢測部7〇7 ; 運算各圖案之度量差之差分度量運算部702、705、708 ;及 累積保存前述差分度量運算部所運算之各圖案的位置偏移 指標之記憶部7〇3、7〇6、709。又,此處之PR等化部8具有 業經設定之頻率特性’可使再生系的頻率特性為 PR(1,2,2,2,1)等化特性。 圖案檢測部7〇1、7〇4、707將第8圖、第9圖、第10圖之 遷移資料與2值化資料作比較,當該2值化資料與第8圖、第 9圖、第10圖之遷移資料一致時,依據第8圖、第9圖、第1〇 圖選擇最有把握之第1狀態遷移列與第2有把握之第2狀態 遷移列。 依據該選擇結果’差分度量運算部7〇2、705、708運算 狀態遷移列之理想值(PR等化理想值:參考第8圖、第9圖、 第10圖)與數位再生訊號的距離,亦即運算度量,且更進一 步運算由2個狀態遷移列所運算之度量間的差,更進一步, 由於該度量差具有正負值,所以進行絕對值處理。 31 201021037 又’圖案檢測部701、704、707依據2值化資料產生脈 波訊號,輸出至記憶部703、706、709,前述脈波訊號係用 以依第15圖、第16圖、第17圖所示之記錄記號的始端邊緣 及終端邊緣之各圖案而分配者。 記憶部703、706、709依據由圖案檢測部701、704、707 輸出之脈波訊號,將差分度量運算部702、705、708所求出 之各圖案的度量差,依第15圖、第16圖、第17圖所示之各 圖案而累加。 在此’詳細地說明第15圖、第16圖、第17圖之詳細之 圖案分類。第15圖、第16圖、第17圖之符號Μ及S,係表示 在前述第5圖所示之記錄記號及間隔之時間序列。符號! 2 Tm 表示記錄記號為2T記號以外者(例如3T記號)。同樣地,間 隔長為2T間隔以外則為!2Ts。符號xTm係具有任意長度之記 錄記號,符號xTs係任意之間隔,在RLL(1,7)記錄碼的情形 下,長度為2T〜8T。又,各圖案號碼分別對應第8圖、第9 圖、第10圖所記載之圖案號碼。 如第15圖所示,14檢測圖案係對由丨個間隔與丨個記號 所構成之1個邊緣進行分類。14檢測圖案的始端係顯示有關 時刻i之記號與時刻i-Ι之間隔的邊緣偏移,14檢測圖案的終 端係顯示有關時刻i之記號與時刻i+l之間隔的邊緣偏移。 如第16圖所示’ 12A檢測圖案係藉更往前丨個時刻或更 往後1個時刻之記號與間隔,對第14圖之14檢出圖案之2T s己號及2T間隔時的分類進行區分。 12A檢測圖案的始端係藉時刻i+1之間隔的長度’對夾 201021037In the state transition rule shown in Fig. 7, the sequence of the record of the other path from the state transition path is M, o, g, g, i, i, (), (), ,, as imagined by the interval Partially replace the "0" of the reproduction data, replace the "r' with the symbol part, the interval of the length of 5T_ or more, the length of the 2Τ mark, and the length of the interval of 2Τ. The PR equivalent ideal waveform of the path is shown in the u-th figure. As the 路径 path waveform, the pattern of the Euclidean distance of 14 shown in Fig. 8 must contain one edge information. The ninth figure shows the state transition pattern with the square of the Euclidean distance of 12, and there are 18 types. These patterns are patterns of 2 bit errors or 2T bit errors, and are patterns of 2 bit errors. As an example, the state transition rule shown in Fig. 7 is explained by s 〇 (k_ 7 > to SO ( k) State transition path. In this case, 'the record sequence can be detected as 〇, 〇, 〇, 〇, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, 0, 〇" 1 path' as imagined by interval Partially replacing the "〇" of the reproduction data, and replacing the "1" with the symbol part, the interval corresponding to the length of the 4T interval, 2T Number, 5T interval or longer. PR of the path, etc. 29 201021037 The price of the ideal waveform shows the scale diameter waveform at the I2®. The migration of the record sequence of the other path is ''oooomoooo'), if you want to replace the recycled data with the interval part. "G" and the symbol part #1, '' correspond to the interval of 5T interval or longer, 2T mark, and 4T interval or longer. The PR equivalent ideal waveform of the path is shown as the 从 way slave waveform in the 12th figure. The pattern of the pattern with an Euclidean distance of 12 shown in Fig. 9 must contain two edge information of the rising edge and the falling edge of the two. The tenth figure shows that the square of the other type of Euclidean distance is 12 There are 18 types of state transition column patterns. These patterns are the contiguous part of the 2 Τ mark and the 郁 郁 , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , The state transition path from s〇(k_9) to S6(k). In this case, the record sequence can be detected and migrated to the "OAOAUO'Oimoki path. If you want to replace the recycled data with the spacer, the '〇' Replace with a mark" Γ, for the interval of 4 inches or more, 2Τ mark, 2Τ interval, 3Τ mark, 2Τ interval or longer. The PR equivalent ideal waveform of the path is shown as the Α path waveform in Fig. 13. 0 Another path The migration of the record sequence is "0,0,0,0,0,1,1,0,0,1,1,0,0,,, as if you want to replace the part of the reproduced data with a mark by the interval part", The interval corresponding to the length of the predetermined interval, the 2T mark, the 2T interval, the 2T mark, and the 2T interval or longer. The PR equivalent ideal waveform of the path is shown as a 3-path waveform in FIG. The characteristics of the pattern with an Euclidean distance of 12 shown in Fig. 至少 are at least three edge information. 30 201021037 Figure 14 shows the structure of the signal evaluation device for evaluating the quality of the reproduced signal in the case of processing the reproduced signal using the PRl 2221 ML method. The quality of the reproduced signal is evaluated by the edge position of the recorded mark. In the signal evaluation device of Fig. 14, the same components as those of the recording control device of Fig. 3 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the recording code is an RLL (Run Length Limited) code of the RLL (1, 7) code. In Fig. 14, the edge shift detecting unit 1 includes a pattern detecting unit 7 that detects a pattern corresponding to the first figure (14 pattern), the ninth figure (12A pattern), and the tenth figure (12B pattern). 12A pattern detecting unit 704, 12B pattern detecting unit 7〇7; difference metric calculating unit 702, 705, 708 for calculating the difference of each pattern; and accumulating the position shift index of each pattern calculated by the difference metric calculating unit The memory unit 7〇3, 7〇6, and 709. Here, the PR equalization unit 8 has the set frequency characteristic 'the frequency characteristic of the reproduction system can be PR (1, 2, 2, 2, 1), etc. The pattern detecting units 7〇1, 7〇4, and 707 compare the migration data of the eighth, ninth, and tenth graphs with the binarized data, and the binary data and the eighth image and the When the migration data of Fig. 9 and Fig. 10 are identical, the most confident first state transition column and the second sure second state transition column are selected according to Fig. 8, Fig. 9, and Fig. 1 . As a result, the difference metric calculation unit 7〇2, 705, and 708 calculates the ideal value of the state transition column (PR equalization ideal value: refer to Fig. 8, Fig. 9, and Fig. 10) The distance from the digital reproduction signal, that is, the operation metric, further calculates the difference between the metrics calculated by the two state transition columns, and further, since the metric difference has positive and negative values, the absolute value processing is performed. 31 201021037 The pattern detecting units 701, 704, and 707 generate pulse signals based on the binarized data, and output them to the memory units 703, 706, and 709. The pulse signals are used in accordance with FIG. 15, FIG. 16, and FIG. The patterns of the beginning edge and the terminal edge of the recording mark are distributed to the memory. The memory units 703, 706, and 709 are based on the pulse signals output from the pattern detecting units 701, 704, and 707, and the difference metric calculating units 702, 705, and 708 The metric difference of each of the patterns obtained is added in accordance with each pattern shown in Fig. 15, Fig. 16, and Fig. 17. Here, the detailed patterns of Fig. 15, Fig. 16, and Fig. 17 will be described in detail. The symbols Μ and S in Fig. 15, Fig. 16, and Fig. 17 show the time series of the recording marks and intervals shown in Fig. 5. The symbol ! 2 Tm indicates that the recording mark is other than the 2T mark ( For example, 3T mark). Similarly, between The length is 2Ts outside the 2T interval. The symbol xTm is a recording symbol of any length, and the symbol xTs is an arbitrary interval. In the case of the RLL (1, 7) recording code, the length is 2T to 8T. The numbers correspond to the pattern numbers described in Fig. 8, Fig. 9, and Fig. 10. As shown in Fig. 15, the 14 detection patterns classify one edge composed of one interval and one mark. The beginning of the detection pattern displays the edge offset of the interval between the symbol i and the time i-Ι, and the terminal of the 14 detection pattern displays the edge offset of the interval between the symbol i and the time i+1. As shown in Figure 16, the '12A detection pattern is the number and interval of the first time or the next one, and the classification of the 2T s and 2T intervals of the 14th picture of Figure 14 Make a distinction. The beginning of the 12A detection pattern is the length of the interval by the interval i+1'. 201021037
在時刻卜1與時胸之間隔之間的時刻記號之偏移進 行分類;或藉㈣_2之記號的長度,對夾在時师時刻μ 之記號之間的時刻卿間隔之偏移進行分類。;2A檢測 圖案的終端係藉_Μ之間_長度,對夾在時刻M盘時 刻1+1之間隔之_時狀2了記號之偏移進行分類;或藉 時刻1+2之記號的長度,對夹在時㈣時糾2之記號之間 的時刻i+Ι之2T間隔之偏移進行分類。 JThe offset of the time mark between the time interval 1 and the interval between the chests is classified; or by the length of the mark of (4)_2, the offset of the time interval between the marks of the time division μ is classified. The terminal of the 2A detection pattern is classified by the _ length between _Μ, and the offset of the mark in the interval of 1+1 at the time of the M disk, or the length of the mark by the time 1+2. The offset of the 2T interval of the time i + Ι between the marks of the correction 2 at the time of (4) is classified. J
如第17圖所示,職測圖案係藉更往前⑽時刻妓 往後1個時刻之記號與間隔,對第_之以檢㈣案之2T 記號與2Τ間隔連續之圖案的分類進行區分。具體而一,係 對夹在〗個記號與窗镇之間仙叫續之取號^間 隔之連續2T偏移進行分類。 職測圖案的始端係藉時刻i+2之記號的長度,對夾 在時刻H2之記號與時刻M之間隔之間的時刻⑻丁記號與 時刻i+Ι之2Τ間隔的偏移進行分類;或藉時刻丨_3之記號的長 度,對夾在時刻U3之間隔與時刻i之記號之間的時刻^之2丁 記號與時刻i+Ι之2T間隔的偏移進行分類。 12B檢測圖案的終端係藉時刻之記號的長度,對爽 在時刻m之間隔與時刻i-2之記號之間的時刻k2T記號與 時刻i-Ι之2T間隔的偏移進行分類;或藉時刻i+3之記號的長 度,對失在時刻i之記號與時刻i+3之間隔之間的時刻丨+1之 2T間隔與時刻i+2之2T記號的偏移進行分類。 如此’藉由第14圖所示之裝置,可將包含i個邊緣偏移 之記號與_之位置偏移、包含2個邊緣偏移之記號本身的 33 201021037 偏移、及包含3個邊緣偏移之將記號與間隔各Η固之組合作 為一組之偏移,分別指標化為各資料圖案。 藉此檢測出包含複數邊緣偏移之圖案時,可藉由對 最有把握之路;L進行邊緣是如何偏移之判斷而評價記錄品 質,可判斷錯誤率高之圖案。 疋本發月係與對資訊記錄媒體形成記錄記號時的 =錄條件之調整方法相關者,再生訊號之評價方法並不限 定於上述方法。亦可使用稱為讀㈣此咖A—ude Margin)之指標值等或其他指標值與評價方法,依據評價邊 參 緣偏移的程度之評價結果而調整記錄記號之邊緣偏移。 本發明係將如此求得之有關邊緣偏移之記錄記號之指 仏作為捕基準’調整記錄條件’以使記錄記號之邊雜 * 移變小。記錄記號的邊緣係記錄記號與間隔之境界。因此, . 若依據習知技術,則如參考第4圖之制,係對應鄰接於邊 緣之記錄記號及間隔之長度,而對記錄條件進行分類。 相對於此’本發明係考慮因記錄記號之微小化而施加 在形成鄰接之記錄記號時之熱的$響,依調整邊緣之記錄 〇 記號、鄰接之間隔、及鄰接於該間隔之記錄記號的各長度, 或依調整邊緣之記錄記號及夾著該記錄記號之前後間隔的 各長度’而改變記錄參數。以了,依順序說明可調整記錄 控制方法及記錄條件,並可實現安定之高密度記錄之本發 明之資sfl記錄媒體、資訊再生裝置的實施型態。 (第1實施型態) 本實施型態,係§兒明可調整記錄控制方法及記錄條件 34 201021037 並可實現安定之高密度記錄之資訊記㈣體。在以下之說 明,雖然係以記錄脈波條件作為應調整之記錄條件,但亦 可以記錄功率條件等其他記錄參數作為應調整之記錄條 件。又,以下雖然係說明記錄記號之始端邊緣及終端邊緣 的位置之控制條件,但亦可為以始端邊緣及終端邊緣所決 定之記錄脈波寬度(例如Ttop)。本實施型態使用伙助靴 方式來處理再生訊號,記錄碼係使用尺1^(17)碼等之 RLL(Run Length Limited)碼。 〈有關始端邊緣之記錄條件的調整方法1β1> 本記錄條件之調整方法Μ,係有關始端邊緣者,其特 徵在於,以具有應調整之始端邊緣之記錄記號作為第丨記錄 記號時,藉由第1記錄記號的長度、位在鄰接於第丨記錄記 號之前方之位置之第丨間隔的長度、及位在不鄰接於第1記 錄記號而鄰接於第1間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長度,而 分類記錄條件。 第18圖之記錄參數表係顯示使用本記錄條件之調整方 法1-1的記錄條件之具體分類方法。在第18圖中,作為記錄 參數之對象的記錄記號,係如上述參考第4圖之說明,以記 錄記號M(i)表示。其他之間隔或記錄記號亦使用相同之符 號。在第16圖中,M(i-2)之記號!2Tm係表示記錄記號為2T 記號以外者(例如3T記號)。同樣地,間隔長度為2T間隔以 外則以!2Ts表示。符號xTm係表示記錄記號的長度不需要特 別限制。以下說明之符號xTs亦同,表示記錄間隔的長度不 需要特別限制。但是,在RLL(1,7)記錄碼的情形下,長度 35 201021037 為2T〜8T。 對與第4圖不同之符號表示加以說明。在本實施型態, 圖案表内所表示之記錄記號與其前後之間隔或記錄記號的 關係變複雜。因此,在各圖案的表示中,僅對作為記錄參 數之對象的記錄記號Μ⑴賦予τ。例如,前方間隔ΜΗ)為 3T間隔、記錄記號M⑴為2T記號時,表示成圖案382丁爪。 更進一步,對與第4圖相同之圖案表示賦予括號()。從而, 圖案3s2Tm係表示成(3s2Tm)。該等記號,亦使用在以下說 明其他記錄條件之調整方法所使用之圖案表。 如第18圖之圖案表所示,當前方間隔S(i-l)為最短間隔 (2Ts)以外’亦即為3T7b1隔以上時,與習知之圖案表第4圖相 同。僅當前方間隔為最短間隔時才對應更前方記號叫幻 的長度’圖案表現不同。亦即,依該最短間隔前方之記號 長度不同,對記錄參數進行不同之設定。 这是因為,當前方間隔為最短間隔時,最容易受到在 前方間隔前方之記錄記號之形之熱㈣響。另外,高 进度記錄之最短記號的大小非常小亦為原因。bd之記錄再 生系統之最短記號長度及最短間隔長度,在25gb記錄約為 149nm在33.4GB記錄約為i 12nm。相對於光點之大小約 250nm ’在33.4GB記錄中,即便最短記號及最短間隔連續 之圖案2略亦可包含在光點内。又,在高密度記錄中,當 己錄。己號長度變短,s£(錄記號的寬度方向之擴大亦變得極 端地〗在形成最短記號時,蓄積於記錄膜内之熱量最少, 可供給至下—個記錄記號之㈣亦少。因此,本實施型態 36 201021037 依最短間隔之更前方之記號長度的不同來分離記錄參數, 以可在高密度記錄中更適切地形成記錄記號。 又’雖然本實施例係將前方之記號長度的差異,分類 成最容易受熱干涉影響之最短記號2Tm與此外之記錄記 號!2Tm,但這是考量到具有記錄參數之電路的規模的情 況,如可無視電路規模,宜將3T記號以上之記錄記號個別 分離以可設定。As shown in Fig. 17, the job test pattern distinguishes the 2T mark of the first (4) case and the 2nd line of consecutive patterns by the mark and interval of the next (10) time. Specifically, the classification is based on the continuous 2T offset between the mark and the window. The beginning of the job test pattern is classified by the length of the mark of the time i+2, and the offset of the interval between the time (8) and the time i+Ι between the mark of the time H2 and the time M is classified; or By the length of the mark of the time 丨_3, the offset between the time of the time between the time U3 and the mark of the time i is divided with the offset of the 2T interval of the time i+Ι. The terminal of the 12B detection pattern is classified by the length of the symbol of the time, and the offset between the time k2T mark between the interval of the time m and the mark of the time i-2 and the 2T interval of the time i-Ι is classified; The length of the symbol of i+3 classifies the offset of the 2T interval between the time 丨+1 between the symbol of the time i and the time i+3 and the 2T mark of the time i+2. Thus, by means of the apparatus shown in FIG. 14, the offset of the mark including i edge offsets and the position of _, the offset of 33 201021037 including the symbols of the two edge offsets, and the inclusion of three edge offsets The combination of the mark and the interval tamping as a set of offsets is indexed into each data pattern. When the pattern including the complex edge shift is detected by this, the recording quality can be evaluated by judging the most sure way; L is how the edge is shifted, and the pattern having a high error rate can be determined. The evaluation method of the reproduction signal is not limited to the above method, and the evaluation method of the adjustment condition of the recording condition when the recording date is formed on the information recording medium. It is also possible to adjust the edge offset of the recording mark based on the evaluation result of the degree of the edge offset of the evaluation, using an index value such as reading (4) of the coffee A-ude Margin, or other index values and evaluation methods. According to the present invention, the index of the recording mark relating to the edge offset thus obtained is used as the basis of the 'adjustment of the recording condition' so that the side of the recording mark is shifted to be small. The edge of the record mark is the realm of the mark and the interval. Therefore, according to the conventional technique, as described in the fourth drawing, the recording conditions are classified corresponding to the lengths of the recording marks and the intervals adjacent to the edges. In contrast, the present invention considers the heat of the heat applied to the adjacent recording mark due to the miniaturization of the recording mark, the recording mark of the adjustment edge, the interval of the adjacent, and the recording mark adjacent to the interval. The recording parameters are changed for each length, or by the recording mark of the adjustment edge and the lengths of the interval after the recording mark. Therefore, the embodiment of the recording control method and the recording condition can be adjusted in order, and the implementation form of the recording medium and the information reproducing apparatus of the present invention for realizing high-density recording can be realized. (First embodiment) In the present embodiment, it is possible to adjust the recording control method and the recording condition 34 201021037 and realize the information recording (four) of the high-density recording of stability. In the following description, although the recording pulse condition is used as the recording condition to be adjusted, other recording parameters such as power conditions may be recorded as the recording conditions to be adjusted. Further, although the following describes the control conditions of the position of the start edge and the end edge of the recording mark, the recording pulse width (e.g., Ttop) determined by the start edge and the terminal edge may be used. In the present embodiment, the regenerative signal is processed using the gang shoe method, and the recording code is an RLL (Run Length Limited) code such as a ruler 1^(17) code. <Adjustment method of recording condition at the beginning edge 1β1> The method of adjusting the recording condition Μ is related to the edge of the beginning edge, and is characterized in that, when the recording mark having the start edge of the adjustment is used as the second recording mark, 1 the length of the recording mark, the length of the second interval of the position adjacent to the position before the second recording mark, and the length of the second recording mark positioned adjacent to the first interval not adjacent to the first recording mark And classify the recording conditions. The recording parameter table of Fig. 18 shows a specific classification method of the recording conditions using the adjustment method 1-1 of the present recording condition. In Fig. 18, the recording symbol which is the object of the recording parameter is indicated by the recording symbol M(i) as described above with reference to Fig. 4. Other intervals or record marks use the same symbol. In Fig. 16, the symbol M2 of the (I-2) indicates that the recording symbol is other than the 2T symbol (for example, the 3T symbol). Similarly, the interval length is outside the 2T interval! 2Ts said. The symbol xTm indicates that the length of the recording mark does not need to be particularly limited. The symbol xTs described below is also the same, indicating that the length of the recording interval is not particularly limited. However, in the case of the RLL (1, 7) recording code, the length 35 201021037 is 2T to 8T. The symbolic representation different from Fig. 4 will be described. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the recording marks indicated in the pattern table and the interval between them and the recording marks becomes complicated. Therefore, in the representation of each pattern, τ is given only to the recording symbol Μ(1) which is the object of the recording parameter. For example, when the front interval ΜΗ is a 3T interval and the recording symbol M(1) is a 2T mark, it is expressed as a pattern 382. Further, the same pattern as that of Fig. 4 is shown with parentheses (). Thus, the pattern 3s2Tm is expressed as (3s2Tm). The symbols are also used in the pattern table used to explain the adjustment methods of other recording conditions. As shown in the pattern table of Fig. 18, the current square interval S(i-1) is the shortest interval (2Ts), that is, when it is 3T7b1 or more, it is the same as the fourth pattern of the conventional pattern table. Only when the current square interval is the shortest interval corresponds to the length of the more forward symbol called illusion' pattern is different. That is, the recording parameters are set differently depending on the length of the mark in front of the shortest interval. This is because when the current interval is the shortest interval, it is most susceptible to the heat (four) of the shape of the recording mark in front of the front interval. In addition, the reason why the shortest mark of the high progress record is very small is also the reason. The shortest mark length and the shortest interval length of the recording reproduction system of bd are about 149 nm at 25 gb and about i 12 nm at 33.4 GB. The size of the spot is about 250 nm. In the 33.4 GB recording, even the shortest mark and the shortest interval continuous pattern 2 can be included in the spot. Also, in high-density recording, when you have recorded it. The length of the hexadecimal number becomes shorter, and s£ (the enlargement of the width direction of the recording mark becomes extremely extreme). When the shortest mark is formed, the amount of heat accumulated in the recording film is the least, and the amount of supply to the next record mark (4) is also small. Therefore, the present embodiment 36 201021037 separates the recording parameters according to the difference in the length of the mark in front of the shortest interval, so that the recording mark can be formed more appropriately in the high-density recording. Further, although the present embodiment is to mark the length of the front The difference is classified into the shortest mark 2Tm which is most susceptible to thermal interference and the other record mark! 2Tm, but this is the case of considering the scale of the circuit with the recorded parameters. If the circuit scale can be ignored, the record of 3T or more should be recorded. The markers are individually separated to be configurable.
特別是’在記錄記號M(i)為3T記號以上的情形下,如 刖方之記錄記號長度為最短記號2Tm,則本記錄條件係對 應遷移資料列的圖案為第10圖所示之12B圖案(嚴密來說, 亦包含有關2丁連續圖案之12A圖案)者;如前方之記錄記號 長度為最短記號以外!2Tm,則係對應遷移資料列的圖案為 第9圖所示之與2T連續圖案無關之12A圖案之記錄條件。從 而,在進行將上述之MLSE作為指標之評價的情形下,可個 別評價12A圖案(與2T連續圖案無關)與12B圖案(包含有關 2T連續圖案之12A圖案),且可獨立調整該等2個圖案之記錄 條件。 第19圖顯示變更記錄參數之記錄脈波,該記錄參數係 有關前方間隔為最短間隔之記錄記號的始端邊緣者。第19 圖的(a)部分為圖案2m2s2Tm之NRZI訊號,第19圖的(b)部分 為對應圖案2m2s2Tm之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第19圖的(c) 部分為圖案4m2s2Tm之NRZI訊號,第19圖的(d)部分為對應 圖案4m2s2Tm之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第19圖的(e)部分為 圖案2m2s3Tm之NRZI訊號,第19圖的(f)部分為對應圖案 37 201021037 2m2s3Tm之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第19圖的(g)部分為圖案 4m2s3Tm之NRZI訊號,第19圖的(h)部分為對應圖案 4m2s3Tm之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第19圖的⑴部分為圖案 2m2s4Tm之NRZI訊號,第19圖的(j)部分為對應圖案 2m2s4Tm之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第19圖的(k)部分為圖案 4m2s4Tm之NRZI訊號,第19圖的⑴部分為對應圖案 4m2s4Tm之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第19圖的(m)部分為圖案 2m2s5Tm之NRZI訊號,第19圖的(n)部分為對應圖案 2m2s5Tm之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第19圖的(〇)部分為圖案 4m2s5Tm之NRZI訊號,第19圖的(p)部分為對應圖案 4m2s5Tm之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波。 作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號,在第19圖的(a) 及(c)部分為2T記號,在第19圖的(e)及(g)部分為3T記號,在 第19圖的⑴及(k)部分為4T記號,在第19圖的(m)及(〇)部分 為5T記號。在第19圖的(a)及(c)部分所示之2個NRZI訊號, 雖然作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號(任一者皆為2T 記號)的前方間隔之任一者皆為最短間隔,但表示著更前方 之記錄記號的長度為最短記號之2T記號或為此外之記號的 差別。因此,即便同樣是記錄2T記號時,如第19圖的(b)及 (d)部分所示,對應NRZI訊號的圖案,設定各記錄脈波之記 錄參數。在第19圖的(b)及(d)部分之記錄記號雖然為2T記 號,但關於其他記錄記號亦相同,係對應各圖案設定各記 錄參數。 在此,記錄記號的始端邊緣係藉由初始脈波之上升邊 201021037 = 脈波之下降邊緣位置dTpeR記錄來 數,而調整至適切之邊緣位置,,咖黯^分別 有依從第1竭之圖案表而麵之值。亦即,存在的表 P的表本實施型態雖然係藉由御似打⑽之記錄 參數而調整記錄記號之始料緣,但亦可僅變更初始脈波 之上升邊緣位置dTpsl。 <有關始端魏之記錄條件的輕方法必In particular, in the case where the recording symbol M(i) is equal to or greater than the 3T symbol, if the length of the recording mark of the square is the shortest symbol 2Tm, the recording condition corresponds to the pattern of the migration data column being the 12B pattern shown in FIG. (Strictly speaking, it also includes the 12A pattern of the 2D continuous pattern); if the length of the record mark in front is the shortest mark! 2Tm, the pattern corresponding to the migration data column is the 2T continuous pattern shown in Fig. 9. Unrelated 12A pattern recording conditions. Therefore, in the case where the evaluation of the MLSE described above is performed, the 12A pattern (independent of the 2T continuous pattern) and the 12B pattern (including the 12A pattern relating to the 2T continuous pattern) can be individually evaluated, and the two can be independently adjusted. The recording conditions of the pattern. Fig. 19 shows a recording pulse wave for changing the recording parameter, which is the leading edge of the recording mark whose front interval is the shortest interval. Part (a) of Figure 19 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2m2s2Tm, part (b) of the 19th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2m2s2Tm, and part (c) of the 19th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 4m2s2Tm. Part (d) of Fig. 19 is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4m2s2Tm, part (e) of the 19th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2m2s3Tm, and part (f) of the 19th figure is the corresponding pattern 37 201021037 2m2s3Tm The recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal, the (g) part of the 19th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 4m2s3Tm, the part (h) of the 19th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4m2s3Tm, and the part (1) of the 19th figure is the pattern. NRZI signal of 2m2s4Tm, part (j) of Fig. 19 is the recording pulse wave of NRZI signal corresponding to pattern 2m2s4Tm, part (k) of figure 19 is NRZI signal of pattern 4m2s4Tm, part (1) of figure 19 is corresponding pattern 4m2s4Tm The recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal, the (m) part of the 19th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2m2s5Tm, the (n) part of the 19th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2m2s5Tm, the (脉) of the 19th figure The part is the NRZI signal of the pattern 4m2s5Tm, and the part (p) of the 19th figure is The recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4m2s5Tm. The recording symbol to be used as the object of adjusting the recording parameter is a 2T symbol in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 19, a 3T symbol in parts (e) and (g) of Fig. 19, and (1) in Fig. 19 The (k) part is a 4T mark, and the (m) and (〇) parts of the 19th figure are 5T marks. The two NRZI signals shown in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 19 are the shortest of the front intervals of the record marks (any of which are 2T marks) for which the recording parameters are adjusted. Interval, but indicates that the length of the log mark further ahead is the 2T mark of the shortest mark or the difference of the other mark. Therefore, even if the 2T mark is recorded in the same manner, as shown in parts (b) and (d) of Fig. 19, the recording parameters of the respective pulse waves are set corresponding to the pattern of the NRZI signal. Although the recording marks in parts (b) and (d) of Fig. 19 are 2T marks, the other recording marks are also the same, and the respective recording parameters are set corresponding to the respective patterns. Here, the beginning edge of the recording mark is recorded by the rising edge of the initial pulse wave 201021037 = the falling edge position dTpeR of the pulse wave, and is adjusted to the appropriate edge position, and the curry has a pattern corresponding to the first exhaustion. The value of the table. That is, although the existing embodiment of the table P is to adjust the starting edge of the recording mark by the recording parameter of the command (10), only the rising edge position dTps1 of the initial pulse wave may be changed. <Light method of recording conditions at the beginning Wei
t 、+之調整方法i·2亦係有關始端邊緣者,其特 1在於’在調整方法丨]中,當前方之記錄記 時’對應更前方之間隔的長度而分類記錄記號。亦即j 特徵在於,以具有應調整之始端邊緣之記錄記號作為第说 錄記號時,藉由第1印銘_ 4 ^ ^ ^ 。己錄s己號的長度、位在鄰接於第1記錄 己號之&方之位置之第}間隔的長度、位在不鄰接於第1記 錄記號而鄰接於第1間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長度、及 位在不鄰接於第1記錄記號與第1間隔而鄰接於第2記錄記 號之位置之第2間隔的長度,而分類記錄條件。 第20圖之記錄參數表係顯示使用本記錄條件之調整方 法1-1的記錄條件之具體分類方法。第_之粗框係對第18 圖進行了擴張之圖案。就該擴張之圖案進行說明。 如第20圖所示,記錄條件的調整方法丨_2,係當前方記 錄記號M(i-2)為最短記號時,對應更前方之間隔s(i_3)的長 度,而設定不同之記錄參數。具體而言,依間隔s(i_3)的長 度為2T或為其他’而設定不同之記錄參數。藉此,例如, 在記錄記號Μ⑴之前方之2T連續圖案2m2s整體發生位元移 39 201021037 位之錯誤中,可對2Τ為3連續圖案2s2m2s之情況與2T為2連 續圖案之!2s2m;2s之情況’設定不同之記錄參數。從而,可 更適切地設定對2T連續圖案之記錄參數,可減少為錯誤原 因之2T連續圖案之移位偏移。 第21圖顯不變更記錄參數之記錄脈波,該記錄參數係 有關前方間隔為最短間隔且前方記錄記號為最短記號之記 錄記號的始端邊緣者。第21圖的(3)部分為圖 案 2s2m2s2Tm 之NRZI訊號’第21圖的(b)部分為對應圖案2821112321111之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波’第21圖的部分為圖案3s2m2s2Trn 之NRZI訊號’第21圖的(d)部分為對應圖案3s2m2s2Tm之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第21圖的(e)部分為 圖案 2s2m2s3Tm 之NRZI訊號’第21圖的⑺部分為對應圖案282〇1283丁111之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第21圖的部分為圖案3s2m2s3Tm 之NRZI訊號’第21圖的部分為對應圖案382111283丁111之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波’第21圖的⑴部分為圖案2s2m2s4Tm 之NRZI訊號’第21圖的⑴部分為對應圖案2s2m2s4Tm之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第21圖的(k)部分為圖案3s2m2s4Tm 之NRZI訊號’第21圖的⑴部分為對應圖案3s2m2s4Tm之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波’第21圖的(m)部分為圖案2s2m2s5Tm 之NRZI訊號’第21圖的(11)部分為對應圖案2s2m2s5Tm之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波’第21圖的(〇)部分為圖案3s2m2s5Tm 之NRZI訊號’第21圖的(p)部分為對應圖案3s2m2s5Tni之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波。 作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號,在第21圖的(a) 201021037 及(C)部分為2T記號,在第21圖的(e)及(g)部分為3Τ記號,在 第21圖的⑴及(k)部分為4Τ記號在第釘圖的(111)及(〇)部分 為5Τδ己號。在第21圖的(a)及(c)部分所示之2個NRZI訊號, 表示著較則方記錄記號之最短記號(2T記號)更前方之間隔 的長度為最短間隔(2丁間隔)或為此外之間隔(在此為ST間隔) 的差別。因此,即便同樣是記錄2Τ記號時,如第21圖的(b) 及(d)部分所不’對號的圖案設定各記錄脈波之 «•己錄參數。在第21圖的(b)及(d)部分之記錄記號雖然為2丁記 號’但關於其他記錄記號亦相同係對應各圖案設定各記 錄參數。 <有關始端邊緣之記錄條件的調整方法2-b 本記錄條件之調整方法2-1,係有關始端邊緣者,其特 徵在於’以具有應調整之始端邊緣之記錄記號作為第1記錄 §己號時’藉由第1記錄記號的長度、位在鄰接於第1記錄記 號之則方之位置之第丨間隔的長度、及位在不鄰接於第1間 隔而鄰接於第1記錄記號之位置之第2間隔的長度,而分類 記錄條件。 更具體而言’當第1記錄記號之長度較預定長度更長 時’使用第1記錄記號的長度、與位在鄰接於第1記錄記號 之前方之位置之第1間隔的長度之組合而分類。另一方面, 當第1記錄記號之長度在預定長度以下時,使用第1記錄記 號的長度、第1間隔的長度、及位在不鄰接於第1間隔而鄰 接於第1記錄記號之位置之第2間隔的長度之組合而分類。 第22圖之記錄參數表係顯示使用本記錄條件之調整方 41 201021037 法2-1的記錄條件之具體分類方法。如第22圖所示,當記錄 記號為最短記號以外,亦即為3T記號以上時,記錄條件的 分類與第4圖所示之分類相同。僅當記錄記號M(i)為最短間 隔時才對應更後方間隔S(i+1)的長度,圖案表現不同。亦 即,依該最短記號後方之間隔的長度為2T或其他,而設定 不同之記錄參數。如第22圖所示,當記錄記號M(i)為最短 記號時,記錄參數係依前方間隔S(i-l)為2T、3T、4T、及5T 以上之4種類而分類,又,依後方間隔S(i+1)為2T或其他之2 種類而分類。又,當記錄記號M(i)為3T以上時,記錄參數 係依前方間隔S(i-l)為2T、3T、4T、及5T以上之4種類而分 類,後方間隔S(i+1)為未分類之1種類。從而,無關記錄記 號M(i)的長度,前方間隔之長度的種類數較後方間隔之長 度的種類數多。 如上述,高密度記錄之最短記號的大小較其他之記錄 記號小。因此,即便前方間隔長,當後方間隔短時,後方 記錄記號形成時之熱量會傳導。亦即,形成記錄記號後, 因之後形成之記錄記號之熱的影響,先形成之記錄記號會 變形。在此情況下,熱的影響一般是與記錄記號之終端邊 緣有關,但由於高密度記錄之記錄記號非常地小,不僅是 終端邊緣,始端邊緣亦會影響。從而,本實施型態依最短 記號之更後方的間隔長度之不同,而分類記錄參數,以可 在高密度記錄中更適切地形成記錄記號。 亦即,本記錄條件雖然隨各第1記錄記號的長度而分 類,但無關於記錄條件之參數係用以調整第1記錄記號之始 201021037 端邊緣的位置者,當各第丨記錄記號的長度所分類之記錄條 件之至少一者在預定長度以下時,亦即當第丨記錄記號的長 度在預定長度以下時,依鄰接於第丨記錄記號之後方之第2 間隔的長度在預定長度以下或較預定長度長,而更分類成2 種。 又,本條件將後方之間隔長度的差異,分類成熱傳導 之衫響最大之最短間隔2Ts與此外之間隔丨2Ts。但這是考量 到具有记錄參數之電路的規模的情況,如可無視電路規 模’宜將3T間隔以上之間隔個別分類以可設定。 特別是,在前方之間隔S(i_l)為3T間隔以上的情形下, 如後方之間隔長度為最短間隔2Ts,則本記錄條件係對應遷 移資料列的圖案為第10圖所示之12B圖案(嚴密來說,亦包 含有關2T連續圖案之12A圖案)者;如後方之間隔長度為最 短間隔以外!2Ts,則係對應遷移資料列的圖案為第9圖所示 之與2T連續圖案無關之12A圖案之記錄條件。從而,在進 行將上述之MLSE作為指標之評價的情形下,可個別評價 12A圖案(與2T連續圖案無關)與12B圖案(包含有關2T連續 圖案之12A圖案)’且可獨立調整該等2個圖案之記錄條件。 第23圖顯示變更記錄參數之記錄脈波,該記錄參數係 有關夾在前方間隔及後方間隔之最短記號的始端邊緣者。 第23圖的(a)部分為圖案2s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號,第23圖的(b) 部分為對應圖案2s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第23圖 的(c)部分為圖案2s2Tm4s之NRZI訊號,第23圖的⑷部分為 對應圖案2s2Tm4s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第23圖的(e)部 43 201021037 分為圖案3s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號,第23圖的(f)部分為對應圖 案3s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第23圖的(g)部分為圖 案3s2Tm4s之NRZI訊號,第23圖的(h)部分為對應圖案 3s2Tm4s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第23圖的(i)部分為圖案 4s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號,第23圖的⑴部分為對應圖案4s2Tm2s 之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第23圖的(k)部分為圖案4s2Tm4s 之NRZI訊號,第23圖的(1)部分為對應圖案4s2Tm4s之NRZI 訊號之記錄脈波,第23圖的(m)部分為圖案5s2Tm2s之NRZI 訊號,第23圖的(η)部分為對應圖案5s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第23圖的(〇)部分為圖案5s2Tm4s之NRZI訊號, 第23圖的(p)部分為對應圖案5s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈 波。 作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號之前方間隔,在 第23圖的(a)及(c)部分為2T間隔,在第23圖的(e)及(g)部分為 3T間隔,在第23圖的⑴及(k)部分為4T間隔,在第23圖的(m) 及(〇)部分為5T間隔。 在第23圖的(a)及(c)部分所示之2個NRZI訊號,雖然作 為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號之前方間隔之任一者皆 為最短間隔(2T記號)’但表示著後方間隔的長度為最短間 隔之2T間隔或為此外之間隔的差別。因此,即便同樣是記 錄2T記號時’如第23圖的(b)及(d)部分所示,對應NRZI訊 號的圖案,設定各記錄脈波之記錄參數。 在此’記錄記號的始端邊緣係藉由初始脈波之上升邊 緣位置dTps2及初始脈波之下降邊緣位置dTpe2之記錄參 201021037 數,而調整至適切之邊緣位置。從而,dTps2及dTpe2分別 有依從第22圖之圖案表而分類之值。亦即,存在dTps2的表 及dTpe2的表。本實施型態雖然係藉由dTps2及dTpe2之記錄 參數而調整記錄記號之始端邊緣,但亦可僅變更初始脈波 之上升邊緣位置dTps2。 <有關始端邊緣之記錄條件的調整方法2-2> 本記錄條件之調整方法2-2亦係有關始端邊緣者,其特 徵在於’在調整方法2-1中,當後方之間隔為最短間隔時, ® 對應更後方之記錄記號的長度而分類記錄記號。 亦即,其特徵在於’以具有應調整之始端邊緣之記錄 記號作為第1記錄記號時,藉由第1記錄記號的長度、位在 r 鄰接於第1記錄記號之前方之位置之第1間隔的長度、位在 . 不鄰接於第1間隔而鄰接於第1記錄記號之位置之第2間隔 的長度、及位在不鄰接於第1記錄記號與第丨間隔而鄰接於 第2間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長度,而分類記錄條件。 第24圖之記錄參數表係顯示使用本記錄條件之調整方 法2-2的s己錄條件之具體分類方法。第24圖之粗框係對第22 圖進行了擴張之圖案。就該擴張之圖案進行說明。 如第24圖所示,記錄條件的調整方法2_2,係當後方間 隔s(i+1)為最短間隔時,對應更後方之記錄記號M(i+2)的長 度,而設定不同之記錄參數。具體而言,依後方之記錄記 號Μ(ι+2)的長度為2T或為其他,而設定不同之記錄參數。 藉此,例如,在記錄記號Μ⑴與後方間隔所構成之27連續 圖案2m2s整體發生位元移位之錯誤中,可對2丁為3連續圖案 45 201021037 2m2s2m之情況與2T為2連續圖案之2m2s!2m之情況,設定不 同之記錄參數。從而,可更適切地設定對2T連續圖案之記 錄參數’可減少為錯誤原因之2T連續圖案之移位偏移。 第25圖顯示變更記錄參數之記錄脈波,該記錄參數係 有關夾在前方間隔及最短間隔之後方間隔之最短記號的始 端邊緣者。第25圖的⑷部分為圖案2s2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊 號,第25圖的(b)部分為對應圖案2s2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第25圖的(c)部分為圖案2s2Tm2s3m之NRZI訊 號,第25圖的(d)部分為對應圖案2s2Tm2s3m之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第25圖的(e)部分為圖案3s2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊 號’第25圖的(f)部分為對應圖案3s2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第25圖的(g)部分為圖案3s2Tm2s3m之NRZI訊 號,第25圖的(h)部分為對應圖案3s2Tm2s3m之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第25圖的(i)部分為圖案4s2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊 號’第25圖的⑴部分為對應圖案4s2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波’第25圖的(k)部分為圖案4s2Tm2s3m之NRZI訊 號,第25圖的(1)部分為對應圖案4s2Tm2s3m之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第25圖的(m)部分為圖案5s2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊 號,第25圖的⑻部分為對應圖案582丁111232111之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波’第25圖的(〇)部分為圖案5s2Tm2s3m之NRZI訊 號’第25圖的(p)部分為對應圖案5s2Tm2s3m之nrzi訊號之 記錄脈波。 作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號之前方間隔,在 第25圖的(a)及(c)部分為2T間隔,在第25圖的(e)及(g)部分為 201021037 3T間隔’在第25圖的⑴及(k)部分為4T間隔,在第25圖的(m) 及(〇)部分為5T間隔。在第25圖的(a)及(c)部分所示之2個 NRZI訊號’表示著後方之記錄記號或最短記號的長度為最 短記號(2T記號)與為此外之記錄記號(在此為3τ記號)的差 別。 因此,即便同樣是記錄2T記號時,亦對應第25(b)圖及 第25(d)圖之各圖案,設定各記錄參數。在第25(b)圖及第25 (d)圖之前方間隔雖然為2T間隔,但關於其他前方間隔亦相 ® 同’係對應各圖案設定各記錄參數。 〈有關終端邊緣之記錄條件的調整方法 本記錄條件之調整方法1-1,係有關終端邊緣者,其特 . 徵在於,以具有應調整之終端邊緣之記錄記號作為第1記錄 . 記號時,藉由第1記錄記號的長度、位在鄰接於第1記錄記 號之後方之位置之第1間隔的長度、及位在不鄰接於第^記 錄記號而鄰接於第1間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長度,而 分類記錄條件。 ® 第26圖之記錄參數表係顯示使用本記錄條件之調整方 法1-1的記錄條件之具體分類方法。如第26圖之圖案表所 示,當後方間隔S(i+1)為最短間隔(2T)以外,亦即為3丁間隔 以上時,與習知之圖案表第4圖相同。僅當後方間隔為最短 間隔時才對應更後方記號M(i+2)的長度,圖案表現不同。 亦即’依該最短間隔後方之記號長度的不同,而設定不同 之記錄參數。 這是因為,與前方間隔為最短間隔的情形相同,後方 47 201021037 間隔亦為熱干涉之影響在最短間隔時最大。特別是,在記 ⑴為3T記號以上的情形下,如後方之記錄記號長 又為最^己號2Tm ’則本記錄條件係對應遷移資料列的圖 案為第1〇圖所示之12B圖案(嚴密來說,亦包含有關2T連續 圖案之12A圖案)者;如後方之記錄記號長度為最短記號以 外!2Tm ’則係對應遷移資料列的圖案為第9圖所示之與2T 連續圖案無關之12A圖案之記錄條件。從而,在進行將上述 之MLSE作為指標之評價的情形下,可個別評價i2a圖案(與 2T連續圖案無關)與12B圖案(包含有關2T連續圖案之12^ _ 案),且可獨立調整該等2個圖案之記錄條件。 第27圖顯示變更記錄參數之記錄脈波,該記錄參數係 有關後方間隔為最短間隔之記錄記號的終端邊緣者。第27 · 圖的(a)部分為圖案2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號,第27圖的(b)部分 為對應圖案2Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第27圖的(c) 部分為圖案2Tm2s4m之NRZI訊號,第27圖的(d)部分為對應 圖案2Tm2s4m之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第27圖的(e)部分為 圖案3Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號,第27圖的(f)部分為對應圖案 〇 3Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第27圖的(g)部分為圖案 3Tm2s4m之NRZI訊號,第27圖的(h)部分為對應圖案 3Tm2s4m之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第27圖的(i)部分為圖案 4Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號,第27圖的⑴部分為對應圖案 4Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第27圖的(k)部分為圖案 4Tm2s4m之NRZI訊號,第27圖的(1)部分為對應圖案 4Tm2s4m之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第27圖的(m)部分為圖案 48 201021037 5Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號,第27圖的(η)部分為對應圖案 5Tm2s2m之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第27圖的(〇)部分為圖案 5Tm2s4m之NRZI訊號,第27圖的(p)部分為對應圖案 5Tm2s4m之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波。 作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號,在第27圖的(a) 及(c)部分為2T記號,在第27圖的(e)及(g)部分為3T記號,在 第27圖的⑴及(k)部分為4T記號,在第27圖的(m)及(〇)部分 為5T記號。在第27圖的(a)及(c)部分所示之2個NRZI訊號, 表示著較後方間隔之最短間隔(2T間隔)更後方之記錄記號 的長度為最短記號(2T記號)與為此外之記錄記號(在此為4T 記號)的差別。因此,即便同樣是記錄2T記號時,亦對應第 27(b)圖及第27(d)圖之各圖案,設定各記錄參數。在第27(b) 圖及第27(d)圖之記錄記號雖然為2T記號,但關於其他記錄 記號亦相同,係對應各圖案設定各記錄參數。 在此,記錄記號的終端邊緣係藉由記錄終了位置偏位 dCpl之記錄參數,而調整至適切之邊緣位置。此情形下, 第24圖之圖案表存在前述dCpl的表。本實施型態雖然係藉 由前述dCpl之記錄參數而調整記錄記號之終端邊緣,但亦 可變更末脈波之下降邊緣位置dLpe(僅記載於第27(b)圖)。 但是,關於單脈波之2T記號,係與前述dTpel及前述dTpe2 競爭脈波設定條件。從而,單脈波記錄之脈波的下降邊緣 位置dLpe,係可使用在前述dTpel及前述dTpe2不適用的情 況。 <有關終端邊緣之記錄條件的調整方法1_2> 49 201021037 本°己錄條件之調整方法1-2亦係有關終端邊緣者,其特 徵在於’在調整方法丨]中,當後方之記錄記號為最短記號 時對應更後方之間隔的長度而分類記錄記號。亦即,其 特徵在於,以具有應調整之終端邊緣之記錄記號作為第1記 錄纪號時’藉由第1記錄記號的長度、位在鄰接於第!記錄 。己號之後方之位置之第丨間隔的長度、位在不鄰接於第1記 錄。己號而鄰接於第丨間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長度 '及 位在不鄰接於第1記錄記號與第1間隔而鄰接於第2記錄記 號之位置之第2間隔的長度,而分類記錄條件。 _ 第28圖之記錄參數表係顯示使用本記錄條件之調整方 法1-2的記錄條件之具體分類方法。第28圖之粗框係對第26 圖之表進行了擴張之圖案。就該擴張之圖案進行說明。 * 如第28圖所示’記錄條件的調整方法^,係當後方之 記錄記號M(i+2)為最短記號時,對應更後方之間隔s(i+3) * 又而°又疋不同之έ己錄參數。具體而言,依後方之間 隔S(i 3)的長度為2τ或為其他,而設定不同之記錄參數。藉 此例如,在圮錄記號M(i)後方之2T連續圖案2s2m整體發 參 生位元移位之錯誤巾,謂抑3連續圖案2s2m2s之情況與 2T為2連_案之Μ禮s之情況,設定不同之記錄參數。 從而,可更適切地設定對2T連續圖案之記錄參數,可減少 為錯誤原因之2Τ連續圖案之移位偏移。 第29圖顯不變更記錄參數之記錄脈波該記錄參數係 有關後方間隔為最短間隔且後方記錄記號為最短記號之記 錄記號的終端邊緣者。第29圖的⑷部分為圖案2Tm2s2m2s 50 201021037 之NRZI訊號,第29圖的(b)部分為對應圖案2Tm2s2m2s之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波’第29圖的(c)部分為圖案2Tm2s2m3s 之NRZI訊號,第29圖的(d)部分為對應圖案2Tm2s2m3s之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第29圖的(e)部分為圖案3Tm2s2m2s 之NRZI訊號’第29圖的(f)部分為對應圖案3Tm2s2m2s之 NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第29圖的(g)部分為圖案3Tm2s2m3s 之NRZI訊號,第29圖的(h)部分為對應圖案3Tm2s2m3s之 NRZI訊號之έ己錄脈波,第29圖的⑴部分為圖案4Tm2s2m2s 之NRZI訊號,第29圖的(j)部分為對應圖案4Tm2s2m2s之 NRZI訊號之s己錄脈波,第29圖的(k)部分為圖案4Tm2s2m3s 之NRZI訊號,第29圖的(j)部分為對應圖案4Tm2s2m3si NRZI訊號之記錄脈波’第29圖的(1)部分為圖案5Tm2s2m2s 之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第29圖的(m)部分為對應圖案 5Tm2s2m2s之NRZI訊號’第29圖的(〇)部分為圖案 5Tm2s2m3s之NRZI訊號,第29圖的(p)部分為對應圖案 5Tm2s2m3s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波。 作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號,在第29圖的(a) 及(c)部分為2T記號,在第29圖的(e)及(g)部分為3T記號,在 第29圖的(i)及⑻部分為4T記號,在第29圖的(m)及(〇)部分 為5T記號。在第29圖的(a)及(c)部分所示之2個NRZI訊號, 表示著較後方記錄記號之最短記號(2T記號)更後方之間隔 的長度為最短間隔(2T間隔)與為此外之間隔(在此為3T間隔) 的差別。因此,即便同樣是記錄2Τ記號時,亦對應第29(b) 圖及第29(d)圖部分之各圖案,設定各記錄參數。在第29(b) 51 201021037 圖及第29⑷圖部分之記錄記號雖然為2T記號,但關於其他 記錄記號亦相同,係對應各圖案設定各記錄參數。 <有關終端邊緣之記錄條件的調整方法2-1> 本記錄條件之調整方法2-1,係有關終端邊緣者,其特 徵在於,以具有應調整之終端邊緣之記錄記號作為第Η己錄 記號時,藉由第1記錄記號的長度、位在鄰接於第丨記錄弋 號之後方之位置之第1間隔的長度、及位在不鄰接於第 隔而鄰接於第1記錄記號之位置之第2間隔的長度,而分类 記錄條件。 ; _ 更具體而言,當第1記錄記號之長度較預定長度更長 時,使用第1記錄記號的長度、與位在鄰接於第1記錄記號 之後方之位置之第1間隔的長度之組合而分類。另—方面, 當第1記錄記號之長度在預定長度以下時,使用第〗記錄記 號的長度、第1間隔的長度、及位在不鄰接於第1間隔而鄰 接於第1記錄記號之位置之第2間隔的長度之組合而分類。 第30圖之記錄參數表係顯示使用本記錄條件之調整方 法2-1的記錄條件之具體分類方法。如第3〇圖之圖案表所 φ 示$ D己錄°己號為最短記號以外,亦即為3 T記號以上時, 記錄條件之分類與第4圖所示之分類相同。僅當記錄記號 M(1)為最短記號時才對應前方間隔S(i-l)的長度,圖案表現 不同。亦即’依該最短記號前方之間隔長度為2T或其他, 而°又疋不门之5己錄參數。如第30圖所示,記錄參數係依後 方間隔S〇+l)為2T、3T、4T、及5丁以上之4種類而分類,又, 依月J方間隔S(i-i)為2τ或其他之2種類而分類。當記錄記號 52 201021037 M(i)為3T以上時,記錄參數係依後方間隔S(i+1)為2Τ、3Τ、 4Τ、及5Τ以上之4種類而分類,前方間隔S(i-l)為未分類之1 種類。從而,無關記錄記號M(i)的長度,前方間隔之長度 的種類數較後方間隔之長度的種類數多。 如上述所示,高密度記錄之最短記號的大小較其他記 錄記號更小。因此,即便後方間隔長,當前方間隔短時, 更前方之記錄記號形成時之熱量會傳導。亦即,會受到先 形成之記錄記號之熱的影響。在此情況下,熱的影響一般 是與記錄記號之前端邊緣有關,但由於高密度記錄之記錄 記號非常地小,不僅是始端邊緣,終端邊緣亦會影響。從 而,本實施型態依最短記號之更前方的間隔長度之不同, 而分類記錄參數,以可在高密度記錄中更適切地形成記錄 記號。 亦即,本記錄條件雖然隨各第1記錄記號的長度而分 類,但無關於記錄條件之參數係用以調整第1記錄記號之終 端邊緣的位置者,當各第1記錄記號的長度所分類之記錄條 件之至少一者在預定長度以下時,亦即當第1記錄記號的長 度在預定長度以下時,依鄰接於第1記錄記號之前方之第2 間隔的長度在預定長度以下或較預定長度長,而更分類成2 種。 又,本實施例將前方之間隔長度的差異,分類成熱傳 導之影響大之最短間隔2Ts與此外之間隔!2Ts。但這是考量 到具有記錄參數之電路的規模的情況,如可無視電路規 模,宜將3T間隔以上之間隔個別分類以可設定。 53 201021037 特別是’在後方之間隔S(i+1)為3T間隔以上的情形下, 如前方之間隔長度為最短間隔2Ts,則本記錄條件係對應遷 移資料列的圖案為第10圖所示之12B圖案(嚴密來說,亦包 含有關2T連續圖案之12A圖案)者;如前方之間隔長度為最 短間隔以外!2Ts ’則係對應遷移資料列的圖案為第9圖所示 之與2T連續圖案無關之12A圖案之記錄條件。從而,在進 行將上述之MLSE作為指標之評價的情形下,可個別評價 12A圖案(與2T連續圖案無關)與12B圖案(包含有關2T連續 圖案之12A圖案),且可獨立調整該等2個圖案之記錄條件。 參 第31圖顯示變更記錄參數之記錄脈波,該記錄參數係 有關夾在前方間隔及後方間隔之最短記號的終端邊緣者。 第31圖的(a)部分為圖案2s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號,第31圖的(b) , 部分為對應圖案2s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第31圖 . 的(c)部分為圖案4s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號,第31圖的⑷部分為 對應圖案4s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第31圖的⑷部 分為圖案2s2Tm3s之NRZI訊號,第31圖的(f)部分為對應圖 案2s2Tm3s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第31圖的⑻部分為圖 β 案4s2Tm3s之NRZI訊號,第31圖的(h)部分為對應圖案 4s2Tm3s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第31圖的(丨)部分為圖案 2s2Tm4s之NRZI訊號’第31圖的⑴部分為對應圖案2s2Tm4s 之NRZI訊號之記錄脈波,第31圖的(k)部分為圖案4s2Tm4s 之NRZI訊號,第31圖的(1)部分為對應圖案4s2Tm4s之NRZI 訊號之記錄脈波,第31圖的(m)部分為圖案2S2Tm5s之NRZI 訊號之記錄脈波,第31圖的(η)部分為對應圖案2s2Tm5s之 54 201021037 NRZI訊號’第31圖的(〇)部分為圖案4s2Tm5s之nrzi訊號, 第31圖的(P)部分為對應圖案4s2Tm5s之NRZI訊號之記錄脈 波。 作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號之後方間隔,在 第31圖的(a)及(c)部分為2T間隔,在第31圖的(6)及(g)部分為 3T間隔,在第31圖的⑴及(k)部分為4T間隔,在第31圖的(m) 及(ο)部分為5T間隔。 在第31圖的(a)及⑷部分所示之2個NRZI訊號,表示著 前方間隔的長度為最短間隔(2T間隔)與為此外之間隔(在此 為4T間隔)的差別。因此,即便同樣是記錄2T記號時,亦對 應第31(b)圖及第31(d)圖之各圖案,設定各記錄參數。在第 31(b)圖及第31(d)圖部分之後方間隔雖然為2Τ間隔,但關於 其他後方間隔亦相同,係對應各圖案設定各記錄參數。 在此’記錄記號的終端邊緣係藉由記錄終了位置偏位 dCp2之§己錄參數,而調整至適切之邊緣位置。此情形下, 第28圖之圖案表存在前述dCp2的表。本實施型態雖然係藉 由前述dCp2之記錄參數而調整記錄記號之終端邊緣,但亦 可變更末脈波之下降邊緣位置dLpe(僅記載於第31(b)圖)。 但是,關於單脈波之2T記號,係與前述dTpel及前述dTpe2 競爭脈波設定條件。從而,單脈波記錄之脈波的下降邊緣 位置dLpe,係可使用在前述dTpel及前述dTpe2不適用的情 況。 <有關終端邊緣之記錄條件的調整方法2-2> 本記錄條件之調整方法2-2亦係有關始端邊緣者,其特 55 201021037 徵在於’在調整方法2_丨中,t前方之間隔為最短間隔時, 對應更前方之記錄記號的長“分離記錄記號。 亦即’其特徵在於,以具有應調整之終端邊緣之記錄 己號作為第1兄錄記號時,藉由第丨記錄記號的長度、位在 鄰接於第1記錄記號之後方之位置之W間隔的長度、位在 不鄰接於第1間隔而鄰接於以記錄記號之位置之第2間隔 的長度、及位在不鄰接於第i記錄記號與第丨間隔而鄰接於 第2間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長度,而分類記錄條件。 第32圖之記錄參數表係顯示使用本記錄條件之調整方 φ 法2-2的s己錄條件之具體分類方法。第32圖之粗框係對第3〇 圖之表進行了擴張之圖案。就該擴張之圖案進行說明。 如第32圖所示,記錄條件的調整方法2_2,係當前方之 · 間隔s(i-i)為最短間隔時,對應更前方之記錄記號M(i_2)的 _ 長度,而設定不同之記錄參數。具體而言,依前方之記錄 〇己號Μ(ι·2)的長度為2T或為其他,而設定不同之記錄參 數。藉此,例如,在記錄記號]^1⑴與前方間隔所構成之21^ 連續圖案2s2m整體發生位元移位之錯誤中,可對2丁為3連續 參 圖案2m2s2m之情況與2T為2連續圖案之丨2m2s2m之情況,設 疋不同之記錄參數。從而,可更適切地設定對2T連續圖案 之記錄參數,可減少為錯誤原因之2T連續圖案之移位偏移。 第31圖顯示變更記錄參數之記錄脈波,該記錄參數係 有關夾在後方間隔及最短間隔之前方間隔之最短記號的終 端邊緣者。第31圖的⑷部分為圖案2m2s2Tm2s之NRZI訊 號,第31圖的(b)部分為對應圖案2m2s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號之 56 201021037 記錄脈波,第31圖的(c)部分為圖案3m2s2Tm2s之NRZI訊 號’第31圖的⑷部分為對應圖案3m2s2Tm2s之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第31圖的(e)部分為圖案2m2s2Tm3s之NRZI訊 號,第31圖的(f)部分為對應圖案2m2s2Tm3s之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第31圖的(g)部分為圖案3m2s2Tm3s之NRZI訊 號,第31圖的(h)部分為對應圖案3m2s2Tm3s之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第31圖的(i)部分為圖案2m2s2Tm4s之NRZI訊 號,第31圖的(j)部分為對應圖案2m2s2Tm4s之NRZI訊號之 Φ 記錄脈波,第31圖的(k)部分為圖案3m2s2Tm4s之NRZI訊 號,第31圖的(1)部分為對應圖案3m2s2Tm4s之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第31圖的(m)部分為圖案2m2s2Tm5s之NRZI訊 • 號,第31圖的(η)部分為對應圖案2m2s2Tm5s之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波,第31圖的(〇)部分為圖案3m2s2Tm5s之NRZI訊 號,第31圖的(P)部分為對應圖案3m2s2Tm5s之NRZI訊號之 記錄脈波。 作為調整記錄參數之對象之記錄記號之後方間隔,在 參 第31圖的⑷及(c)部分為2T間隔,在第31圖的(e)及(g)部分為 3T間隔,在第31圖的(丨)及(k)部分為4T間隔,在第31圖的(m) 及(ο)部分為5T間隔。在第31圖的(a)及(c)部分所示之2個 NRZI訊號,表示著前方之記錄記號或最短記號的長度為最 短記號(2T記號)與為此外之記錄記號(在此為3丁記號)的差 別。 因此,即便同樣是記錄2T記號時,亦對應第31(b)圖及 第31(d)圖部分之各圖案,設定各記錄參數。在第31(b)圖及 57 201021037 第31 (d)圖部分之後方間隔雖然為2Τ間隔,但關於其他後方 間隔亦相同,係對應各圖案設定各記錄參數。 如此’本實施型態可使用作為記錄對象之記錄記號的 長度及鄰接於前方或後方之間隔的長度之組合,而分類用 以將資料列記錄於軌道之記錄條件。因此,即便記錄記號 微小化、資§fl記錄媒體的記錄密度變高,亦可考慮形成鄰 接之記錄記號時之熱的影響,更高精度地將具有適切形狀 之έ己錄§己號S己錄於適切之位置。 又’由於僅當作為記錄對象之記錄記號的長度在預定 φ 長度以下時,才細分記錄條件之分類,所以分類不會冗長, 可以適切之參數規模來調整記錄參數。從而,記錄調整所 需要之記錄裝置的電路規模與儲存記錄參數之區域不會變 · 得過大’又’調整記錄條件所需要的時間亦不會變得過長。 (第2實施型態) 以下’說明依據本發明之記錄裝置、再生裝置、評價 裝置、記錄方法、及再生方法之實施型態。 第34圖係顯示作為記錄裝置、再生裝置、及評價裝置 β 而發揮功能之資訊記錄再生裝置1〇〇的構成之方塊圖。資訊 記錄再生裝置100具有記錄控制部1〇1與再生訊號處理部 102。 記錄控制部101包含光學頭2、記錄圖案產生部11、記 錄補償部12、雷射驅動部13、記錄功率設定部14、資訊記 錄控制部15、及記錄補償參數決定部16。再生訊號處理部 102包含光學頭2、前置放大器部3、agc部4、波形等化部5、 58 201021037 A/D變換部6、PLL部7、pR等化部8、最大概率解碼部9、及 邊緣移位檢測部10。 資訊記錄再生裝置100可裝載資訊記錄媒體卜資訊記 錄媒體1為光學地進行資訊之記錄再生者,例如光碟。 光學頭2使通過物鏡之雷射光收斂於資訊記錄媒體κ 資訊記錄層上之軌道。進行記錄時,藉由使用預定記錄功 率之雷射光而在軌道上形成記錄記號。進行再生時,接收 藉由照射過軌道之再生功率之雷射光而得之反射光產生 表示記錄⑨資訊記錄媒體比資訊之類比再生訊號。物鏡之 開口數為0.7〜0.9,為〇·85更好。雷射光的波長在41〇11111已 下’更佳者為405nm。 前置放大器部3將類比再生訊號以預定之增益放大,並 朝AGC部4輸出。AGC部4使用預先設定之目標增益而放大 再生訊號,以使從A/D變換部6輸出之再生訊號的位準可達 到一定的位準’並將其朝波形等化部5輸出。 波形等化部5具有遮斷再生訊號的高頻區域之lpf特性 與放大再生訊號的預定頻率範圍之濾波器特性,可將再生 訊號之波形整形成期望的特性,並朝A/D變換部6輸出。PLL 部7產生與波形等化後之再生訊號同步之再生時脈,並朝 A/D變換部6輸出。 A/D變換部6與由PLL部7輸出之再生時脈同步而對再 生訊號進行取樣,使類比再生訊號朝數位再生訊號變換, 並朝PR等化部8、PLL部7、及AGC部4輸出。 PR等化部8具有設定之可使再生系的頻率特性為最大 59 201021037 概率解碼部9之假定之特性(例如’卩11(1,2,2,2,1)等化特性) 之頻率特性,對再生訊號實施PR等化處理並朝最大概率解 碼部9輸出,該PR等化處理係進行抑制高頻區域雜訊及附加 蓄意之碼間干涉者。PR等化部亦可具有啊恤如Ιιηρ_The adjustment method i and 2 of the t and + are also related to the beginning edge, and the feature 1 is that in the "adjustment method", the current recording time ' corresponds to the length of the interval ahead and the recording mark is classified. That is, j is characterized in that, when the record mark having the start edge of the adjustment is used as the first record mark, the first seal _ 4 ^ ^ ^ is used. The length of the recorded suffix, the length of the interval adjacent to the position of the & square of the first record, and the second position adjacent to the first interval not adjacent to the first record mark The length of the recording mark and the length of the second interval which is adjacent to the position where the first recording mark and the first interval are adjacent to the second recording mark are classified, and the recording condition is classified. The recording parameter table of Fig. 20 shows a specific classification method of the recording conditions using the adjustment method 1-1 of the present recording condition. The thick frame of the first _ is a pattern of expansion of the 18th figure. The pattern of the expansion will be described. As shown in Fig. 20, the recording condition adjustment method 丨_2, when the current recording symbol M(i-2) is the shortest symbol, corresponds to the length of the further front interval s(i_3), and sets different recording parameters. . Specifically, different recording parameters are set depending on the length of the interval s(i_3) of 2T or other '. Therefore, for example, in the case where the 2T continuous pattern 2m2s before the mark Μ(1) is shifted by the bit shifting 2010 201021037, the case where 2Τ is 3 consecutive patterns 2s2m2s and 2T is 2 consecutive patterns! 2s2m; 2s Case 'Set different recording parameters. Therefore, the recording parameters for the 2T continuous pattern can be set more appropriately, and the shift shift of the 2T continuous pattern which is the cause of the error can be reduced. Fig. 21 shows a case where the recording pulse of the recording parameter is changed, and the recording parameter is the leading edge of the recording symbol whose front interval is the shortest interval and the preceding recording symbol is the shortest symbol. The part (3) of Fig. 21 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2m2s2Tm. The part (b) of the 21st figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 28211232321111. The part of the 21st picture is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3s2m2s2Trn'. The part (d) is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3s2m2s2Tm, and the part (e) of the 21st figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2m2s3Tm. The part (7) of the 21st figure is the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 282〇1283丁111. The pulse wave is recorded. The part of Fig. 21 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3s2m2s3Tm. The part of Fig. 21 is the recording pulse of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 382111283. The part (1) of the 21st part is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2m2s4Tm '21st The part (1) of the figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2s2m2s4Tm, the part (k) of the 21st figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3s2m2s4Tm, and the part (1) of the 21st figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3s2m2s4Tm. The (m) part of Fig. 21 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2m2s5Tm. The (11) part of the 21st figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2s2m2s5Tm. The (〇) part of the 21st picture is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3s2m2s5Tm. FIG. 21 (p) of the recording pulse corresponding to part of the NRZI signal of pattern 3s2m2s5Tni. The recording symbol to be the object of the adjustment recording parameter is a 2T symbol in (a) 201021037 and (C) of Fig. 21, and a 3Τ symbol in parts (e) and (g) of Fig. 21, in Fig. 21 The (1) and (k) parts are 4Τ marks in the (111) and (〇) parts of the nail map, which are 5Τδ. The two NRZI signals shown in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 21 indicate that the shortest mark (2T mark) of the longer-order mark is the shortest interval (two intervals) or For this reason, the difference between the interval (here, the ST interval). Therefore, even if the 2 mark is recorded in the same manner, the «· recorded parameters of each recording pulse wave are set as shown in the (b) and (d) parts of Fig. 21 . The recording marks in parts (b) and (d) of Fig. 21 are two-dot symbols, but the other recording marks are also set corresponding to the respective patterns. <Adjustment method of recording condition at the beginning edge 2-b The adjustment method 2-1 of the recording condition is related to the edge of the beginning edge, which is characterized by 'the recording mark having the start edge to be adjusted as the first record § When the number is "the length of the first recording mark, the length of the second interval of the position adjacent to the first recording mark, and the position adjacent to the first recording mark without being adjacent to the first interval The length of the second interval is classified and the recording condition is classified. More specifically, 'when the length of the first record mark is longer than the predetermined length' is classified by using the combination of the length of the first record mark and the length of the first space of the position adjacent to the position before the first record mark. . On the other hand, when the length of the first recording mark is equal to or less than the predetermined length, the length of the first recording mark, the length of the first interval, and the position adjacent to the first recording mark are not adjacent to the first interval. The combination of the lengths of the second intervals is classified. The recording parameter table of Fig. 22 shows the specific classification method of the recording conditions using the adjustment condition of the recording condition 41 201021037 method 2-1. As shown in Fig. 22, when the record mark is the shortest mark, that is, when the mark is 3T or more, the classification of the recording condition is the same as the classification shown in Fig. 4. Only when the record mark M(i) is the shortest interval corresponds to the length of the rearward interval S(i+1), the pattern behaves differently. That is, different recording parameters are set according to the length of the interval behind the shortest mark being 2T or the like. As shown in Fig. 22, when the recording symbol M(i) is the shortest symbol, the recording parameters are classified according to the front interval S(il) of 4 types of 2T, 3T, 4T, and 5T or more, and S(i+1) is classified as 2T or 2 other types. Further, when the recording symbol M(i) is 3T or more, the recording parameter is classified according to the front interval S(il) of 4T, 3T, 4T, and 5T or more, and the rear interval S(i+1) is not. Category 1 of the classification. Therefore, the length of the unrelated recording symbol M(i) is larger than the number of types of the length of the front interval. As described above, the shortest mark of the high density record is smaller than the other record marks. Therefore, even if the front interval is long, when the rear interval is short, the heat at the time of forming the rear recording mark is conducted. That is, after the recording mark is formed, the first formed recording mark is deformed due to the influence of the heat of the recording mark formed later. In this case, the influence of heat is generally related to the edge of the recording mark, but since the recording mark of the high-density recording is very small, not only the edge of the terminal but also the edge of the beginning is also affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the recording parameters are classified according to the difference in the length of the interval behind the shortest mark, so that the recording mark can be formed more appropriately in the high-density recording. That is, although the recording conditions are classified according to the length of each of the first recording marks, the parameters relating to the recording conditions are used to adjust the position of the end edge of the first recording mark at the beginning of 201021037, and the length of each of the third recording marks is When at least one of the classified recording conditions is below a predetermined length, that is, when the length of the second recording mark is less than a predetermined length, the length of the second interval adjacent to the second recording mark is less than a predetermined length or It is longer than the predetermined length and more classified into two types. Further, this condition classifies the difference in the length of the rear interval as the shortest interval 2Ts of the heat-transmission shirt and the interval 丨2Ts. However, this is a case where the scale of the circuit having the recording parameters is considered. If the circuit size can be ignored, the interval of 3T intervals or more should be individually classified to be configurable. In particular, when the front interval S(i_l) is equal to or greater than the 3T interval, if the interval length at the rear is the shortest interval 2Ts, the recording condition corresponds to the pattern of the migration data column being the 12B pattern shown in FIG. 10 ( Strictly speaking, it also includes the 12A pattern of 2T continuous pattern; if the interval length of the rear is the shortest interval! 2Ts, the pattern corresponding to the migration data column is 12A which is not related to the 2T continuous pattern as shown in Fig. 9. The recording conditions of the pattern. Therefore, in the case where the above-mentioned MLSE is evaluated as an index, the 12A pattern (independent of the 2T continuous pattern) and the 12B pattern (including the 12A pattern relating to the 2T continuous pattern) can be individually evaluated and the two can be independently adjusted. The recording conditions of the pattern. Fig. 23 shows the recording pulse wave of the change recording parameter relating to the beginning edge of the shortest mark sandwiched between the front interval and the rear interval. Part (a) of Fig. 23 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2Tm2s, part (b) of the 23rd figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2s2Tm2s, and part (c) of the 23rd figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2Tm4s, The part (4) of Fig. 23 is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2s2Tm4s, the (e) part 43 201021037 of the 23rd figure is divided into the NRZI signal of the pattern 3s2Tm2s, and the part (f) of the 23rd figure is the NRZI of the corresponding pattern 3s2Tm2s. The recording pulse of the signal, the (g) part of Fig. 23 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3s2Tm4s, the part (h) of the 23rd figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3s2Tm4s, and the part (i) of the 23rd figure is The NRZI signal of the pattern 4s2Tm2s, the (1) part of the 23rd figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4s2Tm2s, the (k) part of the 23rd figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 4s2Tm4s, and the part (1) of the 23rd figure is the corresponding pattern. The recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal of 4s2Tm4s, the (m) part of Fig. 23 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 5s2Tm2s, the (n) part of the 23rd figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 5s2Tm2s, and the 23rd figure (〇 Part of the NRZI signal of the pattern 5s2Tm4s, part (p) of the 23rd figure A recording pulse corresponding NRZI signal of pattern of 5s2Tm2s. The interval before the recording mark as the object of adjusting the recording parameter is 2T interval in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 23, and 3T interval in part (e) and (g) of Fig. 23, at 23rd. Parts (1) and (k) of the figure are 4T intervals, and parts (m) and (〇) of Fig. 23 are 5T intervals. In the two NRZI signals shown in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 23, the shortest interval (2T mark) is indicated as the shortest interval before the recording mark as the object of adjusting the recording parameters. The length of the rear space is the 2T interval of the shortest interval or the difference of the other intervals. Therefore, even if the 2T mark is recorded in the same manner, as shown in parts (b) and (d) of Fig. 23, the recording parameters of the respective recording pulse waves are set corresponding to the pattern of the NRZI signal. The leading edge of the 'recording mark' is adjusted to the appropriate edge position by the rising edge position dTps2 of the initial pulse wave and the recording parameter 201021037 of the falling edge position dTpe2 of the initial pulse wave. Thus, dTps2 and dTpe2 respectively have values classified according to the pattern table of Fig. 22. That is, there is a table of dTps2 and a table of dTpe2. In the present embodiment, although the start edge of the recording mark is adjusted by the recording parameters of dTps2 and dTpe2, only the rising edge position dTps2 of the initial pulse wave may be changed. <Adjustment Method 2-2 of Recording Conditions at the Beginning Edge> The adjustment method 2-2 of the present recording condition is also related to the start edge edge, and is characterized in that, in the adjustment method 2-1, when the rear interval is the shortest interval When , ® sorts the record mark for the length of the record mark that follows. That is, when the recording symbol having the leading edge to be adjusted is used as the first recording symbol, the length of the first recording symbol and the first interval of the position where r is adjacent to the position before the first recording symbol. The length and the position of the second interval adjacent to the first recording mark not adjacent to the first interval, and the position adjacent to the second interval not adjacent to the first recording mark and the second interval The length of the second record mark is classified, and the recording condition is classified. The recording parameter table of Fig. 24 shows the specific classification method of the s recording conditions using the adjustment method 2-2 of the present recording condition. The thick frame of Fig. 24 is a pattern in which the 22nd image is expanded. The pattern of the expansion will be described. As shown in Fig. 24, the recording condition adjustment method 2_2 sets different recording parameters when the rear interval s(i+1) is the shortest interval, corresponding to the length of the rearmost recording symbol M(i+2). . Specifically, different recording parameters are set depending on whether the length of the recording mark Μ(ι+2) at the rear is 2T or the like. Therefore, for example, in the case where the recording symbol Μ(1) and the 27 consecutive patterns 2m2s formed by the rear space are displaced by the bit shift, the case where 2 is 3 continuous patterns 45 201021037 2m2s2m and 2T is 2 consecutive patterns of 2m2s In the case of !2m, set different recording parameters. Therefore, the shift parameter of the 2T continuous pattern can be more appropriately set to reduce the shift shift of the 2T continuous pattern which is the cause of the error. Fig. 25 shows the recording pulse wave of the change recording parameter which is the edge of the shortest mark which is sandwiched between the front interval and the shortest interval. The part (4) of Fig. 25 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2Tm2s2m, the part (b) of the 25th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2s2Tm2s2m, and the part (c) of the 25th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2Tm2s3m, the 25th. The part (d) of the figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2s2Tm2s3m, the part (e) of the 25th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3s2Tm2s2m, and the part (f) of the 25th figure is the record of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3s2Tm2s2m. Pulse wave, part (g) of Fig. 25 is the NRZI signal of pattern 3s2Tm2s3m, part (h) of figure 25 is the recording pulse wave of NRZI signal corresponding to pattern 3s2Tm2s3m, and part (i) of figure 25 is pattern 4s2Tm2s2m The part of (1) of the NRZI signal 'Fig. 25 is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4s2Tm2s2m'. The (k) part of the 25th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 4s2Tm2s3m, and the part (1) of the 25th figure is the NRZI of the corresponding pattern 4s2Tm2s3m. The recording pulse of the signal, the (m) part of Fig. 25 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 5s2Tm2s2m, and the part (8) of the 25th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 582 Ding 111232111. NRZI signal of pattern 5s2Tm2s3m 'Fig. 25 (p) of the corresponding part of the recording pulse signal pattern 5s2Tm2s3m of nrzi. The interval before the recording mark as the object of adjusting the recording parameter is 2T interval in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 25, and 201021037 3T interval in part (e) and (g) of Fig. 25 The (1) and (k) portions of Fig. 25 are 4T intervals, and the (m) and (〇) portions of Fig. 25 are 5T intervals. The two NRZI signals shown in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 25 indicate that the length of the trailing mark or the shortest mark is the shortest mark (2T mark) and the other record mark (here, 3τ) The difference in the mark). Therefore, even if the 2T mark is recorded in the same manner, the respective recording parameters are set corresponding to the respective patterns of the 25th (b)th and 25th (d)th drawings. Although the interval between the 25th (b) and 25th (d) is 2T intervals, the other front intervals are also set for each pattern corresponding to each pattern. <Adjustment method of recording condition at the edge of the terminal The method 1-1 for adjusting the recording condition is related to the edge of the terminal, and the feature is that the recording mark having the terminal edge to be adjusted is used as the first record. The length of the first recording mark, the length of the first interval adjacent to the position after the first recording mark, and the second recording position adjacent to the position of the first interval not adjacent to the second recording mark The length of the token, and the classification of the recording conditions. ® The recording parameter table in Fig. 26 shows the specific classification method for the recording conditions using the adjustment method 1-1 of this recording condition. As shown in the pattern table of Fig. 26, when the rear interval S(i+1) is the shortest interval (2T), that is, the interval of 3 inches or more, it is the same as the fourth pattern of the conventional pattern table. Only when the rear interval is the shortest interval corresponds to the length of the rear mark M(i+2), and the pattern behaves differently. That is, different recording parameters are set depending on the length of the mark behind the shortest interval. This is because, as in the case where the front interval is the shortest interval, the rear 47 201021037 interval is also the influence of thermal interference at the shortest interval. In particular, in the case where the (1) is equal to or greater than the 3T mark, if the recording mark length at the rear is the most 2Tm', the recording condition corresponds to the pattern of the migration data column being the 12B pattern shown in the first figure ( Strictly speaking, it also includes the 12A pattern of the 2T continuous pattern; if the length of the record mark at the rear is the shortest mark! 2Tm 'the pattern corresponding to the migration data column is the one shown in Fig. 9 regardless of the 2T continuous pattern. Recording conditions for the 12A pattern. Therefore, in the case where the above-mentioned MLSE is evaluated as an index, the i2a pattern (independent of the 2T continuous pattern) and the 12B pattern (including the 12T continuous pattern) can be individually evaluated, and these can be independently adjusted. Recording conditions for 2 patterns. Fig. 27 shows the recording pulse wave of the change recording parameter, which is the terminal edge of the recording mark whose rear interval is the shortest interval. Part (a) of the figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2Tm2s2m, part (b) of the 27th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2Tm2s2m, and part (c) of the 27th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2Tm2s4m. Part (d) of Fig. 27 is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2Tm2s4m, part (e) of the 27th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3Tm2s2m, and part (f) of the 27th figure is the corresponding pattern 〇3Tm2s2m. The recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal, the (g) part of the 27th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3Tm2s4m, the part (h) of the 27th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3Tm2s4m, and the part (i) of the 27th figure The NRZI signal of the pattern 4Tm2s2m, the part (1) of the 27th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4Tm2s2m, the (k) part of the 27th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 4Tm2s4m, and the part (1) of the 27th figure corresponds to The recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal of the pattern 4Tm2s4m, the (m) part of the 27th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 48 201021037 5Tm2s2m, and the (n) part of the 27th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 5Tm2s2m, the 27th figure The (〇) part is the NRZI signal of the pattern 5Tm2s4m, the picture of Figure 27 Part (p) is the recording pulse of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 5Tm2s4m. The recording symbol to be used as the object of adjusting the recording parameter is a 2T symbol in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 27, a 3T symbol in parts (e) and (g) of Fig. 27, and (1) in Fig. 27 The (k) part is a 4T mark, and the (m) and (〇) parts of the 27th figure are 5T marks. The two NRZI signals shown in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 27 indicate that the length of the recording mark which is shorter than the shortest interval (2T interval) of the rear interval is the shortest mark (2T mark) and The difference between the record mark (here, the 4T mark). Therefore, even if the 2T mark is recorded in the same manner, the respective recording parameters are set corresponding to the respective patterns of the 27th (b)th and 27th (d)th drawings. Although the record marks in the 27(b) and 27(d) are 2T marks, the other record marks are the same, and the respective record parameters are set corresponding to the respective patterns. Here, the terminal edge of the record mark is adjusted to the appropriate edge position by recording the recording parameter of the end position offset dCpl. In this case, the pattern table of Fig. 24 has the aforementioned table of dCpl. In the present embodiment, the terminal edge of the recording mark is adjusted by the recording parameter of dCpl described above, but the falling edge position dLpe of the end pulse wave (only shown in Fig. 27(b)) can be changed. However, the 2T symbol of the single pulse is a pulse wave setting condition that competes with the dTpel and the aforementioned dTpe2. Therefore, the falling edge position dLpe of the pulse wave recorded by the single pulse wave can be used when the aforementioned dTpel and the aforementioned dTpe2 are not applicable. <Adjustment method of recording condition at the edge of the terminal 1_2> 49 201021037 The adjustment method 1-2 of the condition of the recording is also related to the edge of the terminal, and is characterized in that in the "adjustment method", when the recording mark at the rear is When the shortest mark is used, the record mark is classified corresponding to the length of the rear space. That is, when the recording symbol having the terminal edge to be adjusted is used as the first recording number, the length of the first recording symbol is adjacent to the first! Record. The length and position of the third interval of the position after the number is not adjacent to the first record. The length ' and the length of the second recording mark adjacent to the position of the second interval are equal to the length of the second interval adjacent to the position where the first recording mark and the first interval are adjacent to the second recording mark, and are classified. Record conditions. The recording parameter table of Fig. 28 shows the specific classification method of the recording conditions using the adjustment method 1-2 of this recording condition. The thick frame of Fig. 28 is a pattern of expansion of the table of Fig. 26. The pattern of the expansion will be described. * As shown in Fig. 28, the adjustment method of the recording condition ^ is when the recording mark M (i+2) at the rear is the shortest mark, and corresponds to the rear interval s (i+3) * and ° is different The parameters have been recorded. Specifically, different recording parameters are set depending on whether the length of the rear interval S(i 3) is 2τ or otherwise. For example, in the 2T continuous pattern 2s2m behind the 圮 mark M(i), the total error occurs in the displacement of the participating bits, that is, the case of suppressing 3 consecutive patterns 2s2m2s and the case of 2T being 2 consecutive _ In the case, set different recording parameters. Therefore, it is possible to more appropriately set the recording parameters for the 2T continuous pattern, and it is possible to reduce the shift shift of the two consecutive patterns which are the cause of the error. Fig. 29 shows that the recording pulse of the recording parameter is changed. The recording parameter is the terminal edge of the recording symbol having the shortest interval and the rear recording mark being the shortest symbol. The part (4) of Fig. 29 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2Tm2s2m2s 50 201021037, the part (b) of the 29th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2Tm2s2m2s, and the part (c) of the 29th figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2Tm2s2m3s, Part (d) of Fig. 29 is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2Tm2s2m3s, part (e) of the figure 29 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3Tm2s2m2s, and part (f) of the 29th figure is the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3Tm2s2m2s. The recording pulse wave, the (g) part of Fig. 29 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3Tm2s2m3s, the part (h) of the 29th figure is the recorded pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3Tm2s2m3s, and the part (1) of the 29th figure is the pattern. The NRZI signal of 4Tm2s2m2s, the (j) part of Fig. 29 is the NRZI signal of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4Tm2s2m2s, the (k) part of Fig. 29 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 4Tm2s2m3s, and the part (j) of Fig. 29 The recording pulse wave of the corresponding pattern 4Tm2s2m3si NRZI signal 'the (1) part of the 29th figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal of the pattern 5Tm2s2m2s, and the (m) part of the 29th figure is the NRZI signal '29th figure of the corresponding pattern 5Tm2s2m2s (〇) Part of the pattern NRZ of 5Tm2s2m3s The I signal, part (p) of Fig. 29 is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 5Tm2s2m3s. The recording symbol for the object of adjusting the recording parameter is a 2T symbol in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 29, and a 3T symbol in parts (e) and (g) of Fig. 29, and Parts i) and (8) are 4T marks, and parts (m) and (〇) in Fig. 29 are 5T marks. The two NRZI signals shown in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 29 indicate that the length of the interval shorter than the shortest mark (2T mark) of the rear recording mark is the shortest interval (2T interval) and The difference between the intervals (here, the 3T interval). Therefore, even if the 2 mark is recorded in the same manner, the respective recording parameters are set corresponding to the respective patterns in the 29th (b)th and 29th (d)th portions. The recording marks in the 29th (b) 51, 201021037, and 29(4) sections are 2T marks, but the other recording marks are the same, and the respective recording parameters are set corresponding to the respective patterns. <Adjustment Method 2-1 Regarding Recording Conditions at the End of the Terminal> The method 2-1 for adjusting the recording condition is related to the terminal edge, and is characterized in that the recording mark having the terminal edge to be adjusted is recorded as the third record. In the case of the symbol, the length of the first recording mark, the length of the first interval adjacent to the position after the second recording nickname, and the position adjacent to the first recording mark are not adjacent to the first interval. The length of the second interval, and the recording conditions are classified. More specifically, when the length of the first record mark is longer than the predetermined length, the combination of the length of the first record mark and the length of the first space adjacent to the position after the first record mark is used. And classification. On the other hand, when the length of the first recording mark is equal to or less than the predetermined length, the length of the first recording mark, the length of the first interval, and the position adjacent to the first recording mark are not adjacent to the first interval. The combination of the lengths of the second intervals is classified. The recording parameter table of Fig. 30 shows a specific classification method of the recording conditions using the adjustment method 2-1 of the present recording condition. If the pattern table in Fig. 3 indicates that the $D record is the shortest mark, that is, the 3 T mark or more, the classification of the recording conditions is the same as the classification shown in Fig. 4. Only when the record mark M(1) is the shortest mark corresponds to the length of the front interval S(i-l), and the pattern behaves differently. That is, the length of the interval in front of the shortest mark is 2T or the other, and the parameter of 5 is not recorded. As shown in Fig. 30, the recording parameters are classified according to the rear spacing S〇+l) of 4T, 3T, 4T, and 5 or more. Further, the interval J (S) is 2τ or other. Classified by 2 types. When the record mark 52 201021037 M(i) is 3T or more, the recording parameter is classified according to the rear interval S(i+1) of 4 types of 2Τ, 3Τ, 4Τ, and 5Τ or more, and the front interval S(il) is not. Category 1 category. Therefore, the length of the unrelated recording symbol M(i) is larger than the number of types of the length of the front interval. As indicated above, the shortest mark of the high density record is smaller than the other record marks. Therefore, even if the rear interval is long and the current interval is short, the heat at the time of forming the front recording mark is conducted. That is, it is affected by the heat of the record mark formed first. In this case, the effect of heat is generally related to the front edge of the record mark, but since the record mark of the high-density record is very small, not only the start edge but also the edge of the terminal. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the recording parameters are classified according to the difference in the length of the interval from the farther mark, so that the recording marks can be formed more appropriately in the high-density recording. That is, although the recording condition is classified according to the length of each first recording mark, the parameter relating to the recording condition is used to adjust the position of the terminal edge of the first recording mark, and the length of each first recording mark is classified. When at least one of the recording conditions is less than a predetermined length, that is, when the length of the first recording mark is less than a predetermined length, the length of the second interval adjacent to the first recording mark is less than a predetermined length or more predetermined The length is long and is more classified into two. Further, in the present embodiment, the difference in the length of the front interval is classified into the shortest interval 2Ts of the influence of the heat conduction and the interval therebetween! 2Ts. However, this is a case in which the scale of the circuit having the recording parameters is considered. If the circuit size can be ignored, the interval of 3T intervals or more should be individually classified to be configurable. 53 201021037 In particular, when the interval S (i+1) at the rear is 3T or more, if the interval length in the front is the shortest interval of 2Ts, the recording condition corresponds to the pattern of the migration data column as shown in Fig. 10. The 12B pattern (strictly speaking, also includes the 12A pattern of the 2T continuous pattern); if the interval length in front is the shortest interval! 2Ts 'the pattern corresponding to the migration data column is continuous with 2T as shown in Fig. 9. Recording conditions for pattern-independent 12A patterns. Therefore, in the case where the evaluation of the MLSE described above is performed, the 12A pattern (independent of the 2T continuous pattern) and the 12B pattern (including the 12A pattern relating to the 2T continuous pattern) can be individually evaluated, and the two can be independently adjusted. The recording conditions of the pattern. Referring to Fig. 31, the recording pulse wave of the change recording parameter is displayed, which is the edge of the terminal which is sandwiched between the front interval and the shortest mark of the rear interval. Part (a) of Fig. 31 is the NRZI signal of pattern 2s2Tm2s, (b) of Fig. 31, part is the recording pulse wave of NRZI signal corresponding to pattern 2s2Tm2s, and part (c) of part 31 is NRZI of pattern 4s2Tm2s. The signal, part (4) of Fig. 31 is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4s2Tm2s, the part (4) of the 31st figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2s2Tm3s, and the part (f) of the 31st figure is the record of the NRZI signal of the corresponding pattern 2s2Tm3s. Pulse wave, part (8) of Fig. 31 is the NRZI signal of 4s2Tm3s in Fig. 4, part (h) of Fig. 31 is the recording pulse wave of NRZI signal corresponding to pattern 4s2Tm3s, and part (丨) of Fig. 31 is pattern 2s2Tm4s The NRZI signal '31' is the recording pulse of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2s2Tm4s, the (k) part of the 31st is the NRZI signal of the pattern 4s2Tm4s, and the (1) part of the 31st is the NRZI corresponding to the pattern 4s2Tm4s. The recording pulse wave of the signal, the (m) part of Fig. 31 is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal of the pattern 2S2Tm5s, and the (n) part of the 31st figure is the corresponding pattern 2s2Tm5s 54 201021037 NRZI signal '31st picture (〇) Part of the nrzi signal of the pattern 4s2Tm5s, Figure 31 (of Part P) is the recording pulse of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 4s2Tm5s. The interval after the recording mark to which the recording parameter is adjusted is the 2T interval in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 31, and the 3T interval in the parts (6) and (g) of Fig. 31. Parts (1) and (k) of the figure are 4T intervals, and parts (m) and (o) of Fig. 31 are 5T intervals. The two NRZI signals shown in parts (a) and (4) of Fig. 31 indicate the difference between the shortest interval (2T interval) and the other interval (here, 4T interval). Therefore, even if the 2T mark is recorded in the same manner, the respective recording parameters are set corresponding to the respective patterns of the 31st (b)th and 31st (d) figure. Although the interval after the 31st (b)th and 31st (d)th part is 2nd interval, the other back intervals are the same, and each recording parameter is set corresponding to each pattern. The terminal edge of the 'recording mark' is adjusted to the appropriate edge position by recording the parameter of the end position offset dCp2. In this case, the pattern table of Fig. 28 has the aforementioned table of dCp2. In the present embodiment, the terminal edge of the recording symbol is adjusted by the recording parameter of dCp2, but the falling edge position dLpe of the end pulse wave (only described in Fig. 31(b)) can be changed. However, the 2T symbol of the single pulse is a pulse wave setting condition that competes with the dTpel and the aforementioned dTpe2. Therefore, the falling edge position dLpe of the pulse wave recorded by the single pulse wave can be used when the aforementioned dTpel and the aforementioned dTpe2 are not applicable. <Adjustment method of recording condition of terminal edge 2-2> The adjustment method 2-2 of this recording condition is also related to the edge of the beginning edge, and its special 55 201021037 is characterized by 'in the adjustment method 2_丨, the interval in front of t For the shortest interval, the long "separated record mark" corresponding to the record mark in front of the mark. That is, when the record number having the terminal edge to be adjusted is used as the first track mark, the mark record is recorded by the third mark. The length of the W interval of the position adjacent to the position after the first recording mark, the length of the second interval which is adjacent to the position where the recording mark is not adjacent to the first interval, and the bit are not adjacent to The recording condition is classified by the length of the second recording mark at the position where the i-th recording mark and the second interval are adjacent to the second interval. The recording parameter table of Fig. 32 shows the adjustment method φ method using the recording condition 2-2 The specific classification method of the s recording conditions. The thick frame in Fig. 32 is a pattern in which the table of Fig. 3 is expanded. The pattern of the expansion is explained. As shown in Fig. 32, the adjustment method of the recording conditions is shown. 2_2, When the interval s(ii) is the shortest interval, the _ length corresponding to the preceding record mark M(i_2) is set, and different recording parameters are set. Specifically, according to the record in front, ι· 2) The length is 2T or the other, and different recording parameters are set, whereby, for example, in the error of the bit shift of the 21^ continuous pattern 2s2m formed by the recording mark]^1(1) and the front interval, For the case where 2 is 3 consecutive reference patterns 2m2s2m and 2T is 2 consecutive patterns of 2m2s2m, different recording parameters are set. Therefore, the recording parameters for the 2T continuous pattern can be set more appropriately, which can be reduced to the cause of the error. The shifting offset of the 2T continuous pattern. Fig. 31 shows the recording pulse wave of the change recording parameter, which is the terminal edge of the shortest mark sandwiched between the rear interval and the shortest interval. (4) of Fig. 31 The part is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2m2s2Tm2s, the part (b) of the 31st figure is the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2m2s2Tm2s, 56 201021037, and the part (c) of the 31st part is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3m2s2Tm2s, '31' (4) unit It is divided into the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3m2s2Tm2s, the part (e) of the 31st figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2m2s2Tm3s, and the part (f) of the 31st figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2m2s2Tm3s, the 31st The part (g) of the figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3m2s2Tm3s, the part (h) of the 31st figure is the recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3m2s2Tm3s, and the part (i) of the 31st figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2m2s2Tm4s, the 31st The part (j) of the figure is the Φ recording pulse wave of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2m2s2Tm4s, the (k) part of the 31st figure is the NRZI signal of the pattern 3m2s2Tm4s, and the part (1) of the 31st figure is the NRZI signal of the corresponding pattern 3m2s2Tm4s. The pulse wave is recorded. The (m) part of Fig. 31 is the NRZI signal of the pattern 2m2s2Tm5s, the (n) part of the 31st is the recording pulse of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 2m2s2Tm5s, and the (〇) part of the 31st figure is The NRZI signal of the pattern 3m2s2Tm5s, and the (P) part of the 31st figure are the recording pulse waves of the NRZI signal corresponding to the pattern 3m2s2Tm5s. The interval after the recording mark to which the recording parameter is adjusted is 2T intervals in parts (4) and (c) of Fig. 31, and 3T intervals in parts (e) and (g) of Fig. 31, and Fig. 31 The (丨) and (k) portions are 4T intervals, and the (m) and (o) portions in Fig. 31 are 5T intervals. The two NRZI signals shown in parts (a) and (c) of Fig. 31 indicate that the length of the preceding record or the shortest mark is the shortest mark (2T mark) and the other record mark (here, 3) The difference between Ding. Therefore, even if the 2T mark is recorded in the same manner, each record parameter is set corresponding to each of the patterns in the 31 (b) and 31 (d) portions. In the 31st (b) and 57th 201021037 section 31 (d), the interval is 2Τ, but the other rear intervals are the same, and each recording parameter is set for each pattern. Thus, the present embodiment can use a combination of the length of the recording mark as the recording target and the length of the interval adjacent to the front or the rear, and classify the recording condition for recording the data column on the track. Therefore, even if the recording mark is miniaturized and the recording density of the recording medium becomes high, the influence of heat when forming the adjacent recording mark can be considered, and the shape having the appropriate shape can be more accurately recorded. Recorded in an appropriate location. Further, since the classification of the recording conditions is subdivided only when the length of the recording mark as the recording target is less than or equal to the predetermined length of φ, the classification is not lengthy, and the recording parameters can be adjusted in accordance with the parameter size. Therefore, the circuit scale of the recording apparatus required for the recording adjustment and the area in which the recording parameters are stored do not change. The time required to adjust the recording conditions does not become too long. (Second embodiment) Hereinafter, an embodiment of a recording apparatus, a reproducing apparatus, an evaluating apparatus, a recording method, and a reproducing method according to the present invention will be described. Fig. 34 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the information recording and reproducing apparatus 1 that functions as a recording device, a reproducing device, and an evaluation device β. The information recording and reproducing apparatus 100 includes a recording control unit 1〇1 and a reproduced signal processing unit 102. The recording control unit 101 includes an optical head 2, a recording pattern generating unit 11, a recording compensating unit 12, a laser driving unit 13, a recording power setting unit 14, a information recording control unit 15, and a recording compensation parameter determining unit 16. The reproduced signal processing unit 102 includes an optical head 2, a preamplifier unit 3, an agc unit 4, a waveform equalizing unit 5, 58 201021037 A/D converting unit 6, a PLL unit 7, a pR equalizing unit 8, and a maximum probability decoding unit 9. And the edge shift detecting unit 10. The information recording and reproducing apparatus 100 can load the information recording medium. The information recording medium 1 is a recording and reproducing device for optically performing information, such as a compact disc. The optical head 2 converges the laser light passing through the objective lens to the track on the information recording medium κ information recording layer. At the time of recording, a recording mark is formed on the track by using laser light of a predetermined recording power. At the time of reproduction, the reflected light generated by receiving the laser light of the reproducing power of the orbit is generated to represent the reproduction signal of the recording 9 information recording medium than the information. The number of openings of the objective lens is 0.7 to 0.9, which is better for 〇·85. The wavelength of the laser light is below 41〇11111, and the better is 405nm. The preamplifier section 3 amplifies the analog reproduction signal by a predetermined gain and outputs it to the AGC section 4. The AGC unit 4 amplifies the reproduced signal by using a preset target gain so that the level of the reproduced signal output from the A/D converter 6 can reach a certain level and outputs it to the waveform equalizing unit 5. The waveform equalizing unit 5 has a filter characteristic of blocking the lpf characteristic of the high frequency region of the reproduced signal and a predetermined frequency range of the amplified reproduced signal, and can form the waveform of the reproduced signal into a desired characteristic, and is directed to the A/D conversion unit 6 Output. The PLL unit 7 generates a reproduction clock synchronized with the reproduced signal after the waveform equalization, and outputs it to the A/D converter unit 6. The A/D conversion unit 6 samples the reproduced signal in synchronization with the reproduction clock output from the PLL unit 7, and converts the analog reproduction signal to the digital reproduction signal, and goes to the PR equalization unit 8, the PLL unit 7, and the AGC unit 4. Output. The PR equalization unit 8 has a frequency characteristic that is set such that the frequency characteristic of the reproduction system is maximized 59 201021037 Probability decoding unit 9 (for example, '卩11 (1, 2, 2, 2, 1) equalization characteristics) The PR signal is equalized and decoded by the PR equalization processing unit, and the PR equalization processing performs suppression of high-frequency area noise and additional intentional inter-symbol interference. The PR department can also have a shirt such as Ιιηρ_
ReSP〇nSe)濾波器,使用 LMS(The Least-Mean Square)演算 法,而適應性地控制閥係數(參考「適応訊號処理了少3口 文上」培風館)。 最大概率解碼部9(例如為維特比解碼器)使用最大概率 解碼方式,解碼在PR等化部8被PR等化之再生訊號,並輸 ❹ 出2值化資料,該最大概率解碼方式係依據對應部分響應的 型而蓄意附加之碼規則,而推定最有把握的序列者。藉由 解調2值化資料,可獲得記錄於資訊記錄媒體1之資訊,亦 . 即獲得使用者資料。 邊緣移位檢測部10接收由pR等化部8輸出之業經波形 整形之數位再生訊號與由最大概率解碼部9輸出2值化訊 號。邊緣移位檢測部10比較第8圖至第1〇圖所示之遷移資料 列與2值化訊號,當該2值化訊號與第8圖至第1〇圖所示之遷 ® 移資料列一致時,依據第8圖至第1〇圖選擇最有把握之第1 狀態遷移列與第2有把握之第2狀態遷移列。 依據該結果,運算狀態遷移列之理想值(PR等化理想 值,參考第8圖至第1〇圖)與數位再生訊號的距離,亦即運 算度量。更進一步,運算由2個狀態遷移列所運算出之度量 的差。最後,邊緣移位檢測部10依據2值化訊號,依記錄記 號的始終端邊緣之各圖案而分配前述度量差,對應各圖案 60 201021037 由記錄補償參數之最佳值尋求邊緣移位。 δ己錄補償參數決定部16將由複數記錄記號及分別設於 複數記錄記號之間的複數間隔所構成的資料列,分類成至 少包含1個記錄記號與至少1個間隔之各資料圖案,決定記 錄條件為各資料圖案。 具體而言,使用包含於資料列之第丨記錄記號的長度、 與位在鄰接於第1記錄記號之前方或後方之位置之第i間隔 的長度之組合而分類,並依位在不鄰接於第丨記錄記號而鄰 接於第1間隔之位置之第2記錄記號的長度而更進一步分 類,依業經分類之各資料圖案而分配記錄條件。 或,使用包含於資料列之第1記錄記號的長度、與位在 鄰接於第1記錄記號之或後方之位置之第丨間隔的長度之組 合而分類,並依位在不鄰接於第丨間隔而鄰接於第〖記錄記 號之位置之第2間隔的長度而更進一步分類,依業經分類之 各資料圖案而分配記錄條件。 亦即,記錄補償參數決定部16決定依各資料圖案而分 類之記錄條件,亦即決定記錄參數的圖案表。又,該圖案 表的決定不需依各記錄動作,可對應記錄之資訊記錄媒體1 的種類與記錄倍速等條件、及再生訊號處理之pRML方式而 獨特地決定。 資訊記錄控制部15依循記錄補償參數決定部16所決定 之圖案表而變更記錄參數之設定。 但疋,資訊記錄控制部丨5是由邊緣移位檢測部1〇所檢 測出之邊緣移位量,而判斷記錄參數需要變更設定的部 201021037 位。因此,邊緣移位檢測部10之圖案分類、與記錄補償參 數決定部16的圖案表之分類宜為相同。 記錄圖案產生部11調變應記錄之資訊,產生作為資料 列之NRZI訊號。記錄補償部12以在資訊記錄控制部15業經 變更之記錄參數為基準,產生依循NRZI訊號之記錄脈波 列。記錄功率設定部14進行峰值功率pp、底值功率扑等各 記錄功率之設定。雷射驅動部13依循記錄脈波列及記錄功 率設定部14所設定之記錄功率,控制光學頭2之雷射發光動 作。The ReSP〇nSe) filter uses the LMS (The Least-Mean Square) algorithm to adaptively control the valve coefficients (refer to "Appropriate Signal Processing for 3 Ports". The maximum probability decoding unit 9 (for example, a Viterbi decoder) decodes the reproduced signal that is equalized by the PR in the PR equalization unit 8 using the maximum probability decoding method, and outputs the binarized data, which is based on the maximum probability decoding method. The code rule is deliberately attached to the type of partial response, and the most sure sequence is presumed. By demodulating the binarized data, the information recorded on the information recording medium 1 can be obtained, that is, the user data is obtained. The edge shift detecting unit 10 receives the waveform-shaped digital reproduced signal output from the pR equalizing unit 8 and outputs the binary signal by the maximum probability decoding unit 9. The edge shift detecting unit 10 compares the migrated data column and the binary signal shown in FIG. 8 to FIG. 1 , and the binary signal and the shifted data column shown in FIG. 8 to FIG. When they match, the most confident first state transition column and the second sure second state transition column are selected according to Fig. 8 to Fig. 1 . Based on the result, the ideal value of the state transition column (PR equalization ideal value, refer to Fig. 8 to Fig. 1) and the distance of the digital reproduction signal, that is, the operation metric. Further, the difference between the metrics calculated by the two state transition columns is calculated. Finally, the edge shift detecting unit 10 assigns the aforementioned metric difference according to each pattern of the always-end edge of the recording mark according to the binary signal, and the edge shift is sought from the optimum value of the recording compensation parameter for each pattern 60 201021037. The δ record compensation parameter determination unit 16 classifies the data sequence composed of the complex record marks and the complex intervals provided between the plurality of record marks into at least one record mark and at least one interval, and determines the record. The conditions are the data patterns. Specifically, the length of the ninth record mark included in the data column is combined with the length of the ith interval of the position adjacent to or before the first record mark, and the position is not adjacent to The second recording mark is further classified according to the length of the second recording mark at the position of the first interval, and the recording condition is assigned in accordance with each of the classified data patterns. Or, using the combination of the length of the first record symbol included in the data column and the length of the third interval of the position adjacent to or behind the first record mark, and depending on the position not adjacent to the second interval Further, the length of the second interval adjacent to the position of the recording mark is further classified, and the recording conditions are assigned according to the respective data patterns classified. In other words, the recording compensation parameter determining unit 16 determines the recording conditions classified according to the respective data patterns, that is, the pattern table in which the recording parameters are determined. Further, the determination of the pattern table does not need to be performed in accordance with each recording operation, and can be uniquely determined in accordance with the type of the information recording medium 1 to be recorded, the conditions such as the recording speed, and the pRML method of the reproduction signal processing. The information recording control unit 15 changes the setting of the recording parameters in accordance with the pattern table determined by the recording compensation parameter determining unit 16. However, the information recording control unit 丨5 is the portion of the 201021037 which is determined by the edge shift detecting unit 1 to detect the amount of edge shift detected by the edge shift detecting unit 1 . Therefore, the pattern classification of the edge shift detecting unit 10 and the classification of the pattern table of the recording compensation parameter determining unit 16 are preferably the same. The recording pattern generating portion 11 modulates the information to be recorded, and generates an NRZI signal as a data column. The recording compensating unit 12 generates a recording pulse train that follows the NRZI signal based on the recording parameters that have been changed by the information recording control unit 15. The recording power setting unit 14 sets the respective recording powers such as the peak power pp and the bottom power. The laser drive unit 13 controls the laser light emission operation of the optical head 2 in accordance with the recording power set by the recording pulse train and the recording power setting unit 14.
接下來,詳細說明資訊記錄再生裝置1〇〇之動作。如第 34圖所示,裝載資訊記錄媒體丨後,光學頭2移動至用以調 整最適合之記錄參數之記錄區域。該記錄區域,例如為設 在資訊記錄媒體的最内周之調整記錄功率及記錄脈波用^ 測試記錄區域(OPC區域)。Next, the operation of the information recording and reproducing apparatus 1 will be described in detail. As shown in Fig. 34, after the information recording medium is loaded, the optical pickup 2 is moved to a recording area for adjusting the most suitable recording parameters. The recording area is, for example, an adjustment recording power set on the innermost circumference of the information recording medium and a recording pulse recording area (OPC area).
記錄圖案產生部⑽了職記錄,產生作為資料列 記錄調整用圖案,輸出至記錄補償部12。資訊記錄控制 15將儲存於記錄再生裝置内部(例如記龍)之初期記錄 件,套用至記錄補償圖案決定部16所決定之圖案表之記 條件’而妓記錄脈波形狀及記錄功率之記錄參數。記 條件亦可記錄於資訊記制體丨之批區域。此情形下, 可將雷射光照射至PIC區域,由資訊記錄媒體冰得記錄 件之資訊’套用至初期記錄條件。The recording pattern generating unit (10) records the job and generates a pattern for recording and adjusting the data, and outputs it to the recording compensating unit 12. The information recording control 15 applies the initial recording material stored in the recording/reproducing device (for example, Keelong) to the recording condition of the pattern table determined by the recording compensation pattern determining unit 16 and records the pulse waveform shape and the recording power of the recording power. . The conditions can also be recorded in the batch area of the information recording body. In this case, the laser light can be irradiated to the PIC area, and the information recorded by the information recording medium is applied to the initial recording condition.
記錄補償部12以由資訊記錄控制部15輸 之記錄脈波形狀為基準’依循記錄調整用圖案,產己Z 62 201021037 發光波形之記錄脈波列。 記錄功率設定部14對應資訊記錄控制部丨5之初期記錄 條件,設定峰值功率Pp、底值功率朴等各記錄功率。 雷射驅動部13依循在記錄補償部12產生之記錄脈波 歹J、及在s己錄功率設定部14設定之記錄功率,控制光學頭2 之雷射發光動作,將記錄資料記錄於資訊記錄媒體i。 接著,資訊記錄再生裝置100再生業經記錄之記錄資 料。 光學頭2產生表示由資訊記錄媒體丨讀出之資訊之類比 再生訊號。類比再生訊號藉前置放大器部3而被放大,經AC 耦合後輸入至AGC部4。AGC部4則調整增益,使後段的波 形等化部5的輸出為一定振幅。由入〇(:部4輸出之類比再生 訊號藉波形等化部5進行波形整形。業經波形整形之類比再 生訊號輸出至A/D變換部6。A/D變換部6與由PLL部7輸出之 再生時脈同步,對類比再生訊號進行取樣。pLL部7由在A/D 變換部6業經取樣之數位再生訊號抽出再生時脈。 藉A/D變換部6取樣而產生之數位再生訊號輸入至pR 等化部8。PR等化部8對數位再生訊號之波形進行整形。最 大概率解碼部9對由PR等化部8輸出之業經波形整形之數位 再生訊號進行最大概率解碼,產生2值化訊號。 邊緣移位檢測部10接收由PR等化部8輸出之業經波形 整形之數位再生訊號、與由最大概率解碼部9輸出之2值化 訊號。更進一步,邊緣移位檢測部1〇尋求來自記錄補償參 數最佳值的偏移,亦即尋求邊緣移位。輸出邊緣移位至資 63 201021037 訊記錄控制部】5。 5 3 _制部】5由在邊緣移位檢測部1() 數(例如,存在與目斷需要變更設定之記錄參 的記錄參數等)進行值(例如誤差20%)大 佳值之偏移,_目標㈣為;^緣移㈣由靖參數之最 對資=:二動:’本實施型態之資訊記錄再生裝置刚The recording compensating unit 12 follows the recording adjustment pattern based on the shape of the recording pulse wave transmitted from the information recording control unit 15, and produces a recording pulse train of the emission waveform of Z 62 201021037. The recording power setting unit 14 sets the respective recording powers such as the peak power Pp and the bottom power, in accordance with the initial recording conditions of the information recording control unit 丨5. The laser drive unit 13 controls the laser light emission operation of the optical head 2 in accordance with the recording pulse 歹J generated by the recording compensation unit 12 and the recording power set in the s recording power setting unit 14, and records the recorded data in the information recording. Media i. Next, the information recording and reproducing apparatus 100 reproduces the recorded data recorded. The optical head 2 produces an analog reproduction signal indicating information read by the information recording medium. The analog reproduction signal is amplified by the preamplifier section 3, and is AC-coupled and input to the AGC section 4. The AGC unit 4 adjusts the gain so that the output of the waveform equalization unit 5 in the subsequent stage has a constant amplitude. Waveform shaping is performed by the waveform equalization unit 5 of the analog signal output from the input unit 4: the analog reproduction signal of the waveform shaping is output to the A/D conversion unit 6. The A/D conversion unit 6 and the PLL unit 7 output The reproduction clock synchronization is performed to sample the analog reproduction signal, and the pLL unit 7 extracts the reproduction clock from the digital reproduction signal sampled by the A/D conversion unit 6. The digital reproduction signal input by the A/D conversion unit 6 is sampled. To the pR equalization unit 8. The PR equalization unit 8 shapes the waveform of the digital reproduction signal. The maximum probability decoding unit 9 performs maximum probability decoding on the waveform-shaped digital reproduction signal output from the PR equalization unit 8, and generates a binary value. The edge shift detecting unit 10 receives the waveform-shaped digital reproduced signal output from the PR equalizing unit 8 and the binary signal outputted from the maximum probability decoding unit 9. Further, the edge shift detecting unit 1 Seeking the offset from the best value of the recording compensation parameter, that is, seeking the edge shift. The output edge is shifted to the capital 63 201021037 The recording control unit is 5. 5 3 _ the system is 5 by the edge shift detecting unit 1 ( Number (for example, existence and It is necessary to change the record parameters of the record of the setting, etc.) to perform the offset of the value (for example, the error of 20%), the target (4) is; the edge shift (4) is the most appropriate of the parameters of the Jing == two moves: ' The information recording and reproducing device of the present embodiment
作、再生―檢 -值,藉此,可進行=::::邊緣移”接近 又,如第1實施型態之說明,由 考慮一方式之圖案表而進行記錄二=::: ^對應丨個間隔與記錄記號之邊緣偏移之記錄而For the process of recording, the value of the =:::: a record of the interval offset from the edge of the record mark
她靖。W㈣次刪L 提供更安定之記…錯誤率減少之記錄’可 本實施型態為了說明記錄再生動作,而為包含再生訊 2處理部而之資訊記錄再生裝置,但㈣構成為僅具有只 進行記錄控制之記錄控制部101之記錄裝置。 以上’上述實施型態之圖案表雖然將5了以上之記錄記 =及間隔的長度整合成1個,但亦可對應5了至最長記號為止 的記錄記號及間隔而個別設定。 又,上述實施型態雖然係對各圖案改變記錄脈波之邊 64 201021037 j立晋,彳 -亦可對應圖案而使記錄脈波整體移位。此产形 下’由於用於調整記錄之記錄參數減少,所以可減少保存 η己錄參數之資訊記錄再生裝置_記赌容量。μShe is Jing. W (four) times to delete L to provide more stability... record of error rate reduction 'This embodiment is an information recording and reproducing apparatus including a reproduction unit 2 processing unit for explaining the recording and reproducing operation, but (4) is configured to have only The recording device of the recording control unit 101 for recording control. In the above-described pattern table of the above-described embodiment, although the length of the recording record of 5 or more and the length of the interval are integrated into one, it is also possible to individually set the recording mark and the interval from the fifth to the longest mark. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the side of the recording pulse wave is changed for each pattern. 64 201021037 j Li Jin, 彳 - The recording pulse wave can be shifted as a whole in accordance with the pattern. In this production form, since the recording parameters for adjusting the recording are reduced, it is possible to reduce the information recording and reproducing apparatus _ betting capacity for storing the parameters recorded. μ
^又,以上述圖案表分類之記錄條件,亦可記栽於資訊 讀媒體β。藉此,記賴償參數蚊糾可*需辦應 資訊記錄媒體之種類與記錄倍速而決定圖案表,可剛減 路規模。X,在記载有依循圖絲之最適合前述資訊 媒體之e錄條件的情形下,可刪減記錄參數之調整、或縮 上述實施型態中’邊緣移位的目標值雖,然為0,位亦可 依各廠牌之資訊記錄媒體之種類與記錄倍速、或依包含於 疋圖案而設定。例如,在資訊記錄再生I置的 PW’ :儲存目標值。又,由於可藉由更加儲存對應新 :,:=:體之目標值’而可對應新的資訊記錄媒 的資訊記錄:=在可重寫型之記憶體。x’對應新 副為最佳二m值,可藉由再生資訊記錄再生震置 、°己錄參數所形成之記錄記號而決定。 等化使料短記號長度為2之碼與由 最大概率解碼W2、2、υ所衫之狀態遷移規則而進行 例如,、、,情形加以說明,但本発明並不限定於此。 化方_^可7在制最短記號長度為2或3之碼與等 之碼與等化方切' 叫的情形、使用最短記號長度為2或3 號長度為3之抑等 =C1、C1、CG)的情形與制最短記 碼-等化方式 PR(C〇、C1、C2、cl、c〇m 65 201021037 形。CO、Cl、C2為任意之正數。 又,上述實施型態在各圖案表中,雖然僅就最短記號 長度之記號與間隔進行詳細之分類,但本發明並不限定於 此。例如’亦可套用在不是最短記號長度之僅較最短記號 長之s己號與間隔,可套用在更長之記號與間隔。 上述實施型態之資訊記錄媒體並不限定於CD、DVD、 BD等光碟,亦可套用在MO(Magneto-Optical Disc)等光磁氣 媒體、與數位號之記錄碼(〇或1)為連續長度之改變對應極 性間隔所形成之資訊(本實施型態為記錄記號及間隔)的長 _ 度或相位而記錄資訊之資訊記錄媒體。 又’本發明之記錄再生裝置的一部分係作為調整用以 將資訊記錄於資訊記錄媒體之記錄脈波形狀之記錄條件調 , 整裝置,可製造作為1晶片化之LSI(半導体積體電路)或其一 部分的機能。又,當記錄再生裝置的一部分製造作為1晶片 化之LSI時’可大幅地縮短用以調整記錄參數之訊號処理時 間。記錄再生裝置的各部分亦可獨立製造作為LSI。 (關於記錄波形) 參 上述實施型態中,雖然構成記錄脈波列之記錄脈波具 有多脈波波形’但亦可使用其他波形之記錄脈波。以下, 一面參考第35圖至第37圖一面説明包含多脈波波形之可利 用本發明之記錄脈波。 對資訊記錄媒之記錄,係藉由以下而進行:依循預定 之調變規則’調變應記錄之資訊(使用者資料或原始資料) 以產生複數之記錄調變碼,照射脈波狀的光束,形成複數 66 201021037 記錄記號及間隔(記錄記號與記錄記號間之間隔),該複數記 錄記號及間隔具有分別對應複數記錄調變碼之長度。對於 依據何種波形而發射脈波狀光束,在以下說明3個例子。 第35圖至第37圖之任一者皆為方便說明,而使用最短記號 為2T(T為基準時脈、調變之基準週期)的情形,但並不限定 於此。又,在第1圖的說明中,雖然說明記錄記號及間隔的 長度為2Τ〜8Τ,但第35圖至第37圖為包含9Τ者。該9Τ係使 用作為同步碼(sync code)(同步碼序列)之圖案。 通常,將資料(原始之原始資料/調變前之二進制資料) S己錄於δ己錄媒體時,會將其分割成預定大小,並將分割成 預定大小之資料更分割成預定長度之框(frame),依每個框 插入預定之同步碼/同步碼序列(框同步區域)。分割成框之 資料,係依循與記錄媒體之記錄再生訊號特性一致之預定 調變規則,記錄作為業經調變之資料碼序列(框資料區域)。 一方面,由於插入於框間之同步碼/同步碼序列不適用 前述預定調變規則,所以可能包含因該調變規則而被拘束 之碼長以外之圖案。該同步碼/同步碼序列,係決定再生記 錄之資料時的再生處理時序者。作為預定之調變規則,例 如1 一7調變時,由於記號的長度限制在2T〜8T,所以作為包 含該同步碼之圖案,使用該1一7調變不會出現之9Τ。 <Ν-1 策略(strategy)〉 第35圖顯示第1記錄波形。該第丨記錄波形為多脈波型 策略,亦即,包含複數脈波(多脈波),複數脈波中,以配置 於前頭之初始脈波(亦稱為初始脈波,寬度Tt〇p)、配置於最 67 201021037 後尾之末脈波(寬度Tip)、及配置於初始脈波與末脈波之間 之中間脈波(寬度Tmp)而構成。又,作為有關記錄功率之參 數,Pw為記錄功率、Pbw為底值功率、Pe為冷卻功率(冷卻 功率)、Ps及Pe為偏功率(可燒錄型:ps為間隔功率,可重寫 型:Pe為消去功率)。記錄功率?评亦可稱為峰值功率pp。底 值功率Pbw亦可表示為Pb。 用以記錄最短記號(2T)之記錄波形不包含末脈波與中 間脈波,用以記錄第二短記號(3T)之記錄波形不包含中間 脈波。從用以記錄第三短記號(4T)之記錄波形開始包含中 參 間脈波’且每增加1T,中間脈波之脈波數亦增加1個。該第 1記錄波形的特徵之一在於,用以記錄nT記號(η為自然數) 之記錄波形所包含之脈波數為(η-1)個。 - 如下所示,亦可對應記錄記號與鄰接之間隔的長度而 _ 分類設定各種參數。首先,例如,初始脈波的上升位置dTtop 與寬度Ttop亦可分類成記錄記號的長度為「2T」、「3T」、「4T 以上」3種,或/更分類成鄰接之先行間隔的長度為「2Τ」、 φ 「3Τ」、「4Τ」、「5Τ以上」4種而設定。 又,例如,末脈波之寬度Tip亦可分類成記錄記號的長 度為「3T」、「4T以上」2種而設定。 又,例如,用以設定冷卻功率位準Pc之終了位置(偏功 率位準:用以設定Ps及Pe之開始位置)dTs亦可分類成記錄記 號的長度為「2T」、「3T」、「4T以上」3種而設定。 <N/2策略〉 第36圖顯示第2記錄波形。該第2記錄波形亦為多脈波 68 201021037 型策略。用以記錄最短記號(2T)及第二短記號(3T)之記錄波 形不包含末脈波與中間脈波,用以記錄第三短記號(4Τ)及 第四短記號(5Τ)之記錄波形不包含中間脈波。從用以記錄 第五短記號(6Τ)之記錄波形開始包含中間脈波,且每增加 2Τ ’中間脈波之脈波數增加1個。該第2記錄波形的特徵之 —在於,用以記錄mT記號(m為自然數)之記錄波形所包含 之脈波數為(m+2)個。 如下所示,亦可對應記錄記號的長度而分類設定各種 參數。首先,例如,初始脈波的上升位置dTtop與寬度Ttop 亦可分類成記錄記號的長度為「2T」、「3T」、「4T、6T、8T」、 「5Τ、7Τ、9Τ」4種而設定。 又,例如,中間脈波的上升位置dTmp亦可分類成記錄 記號的長度為「6T、8T」、「7T、9T」2種而設定。更進一 步,例如,亦可使前者之分類與基準時脈位置一致,後者 之分類由基準時脈位置偏移T/2。 又,例如,末脈波的上升位置dTlp與寬度Tip亦可分類 成記錄記號的長度為「4T、6T、8T」、「5T、7T、9T」2種 而設定。更進一步’關於dT1P ’例如’亦可使前者之分類 與基準時脈位置一致’後者之分類由基準時脈位置偏移 T/2。 又,例如,用以設定冷卻功率位準Pe之終了位置(偏功 率位準:用以設定Ps及Pe之開始位置)dTs亦可分類成記錄記 號的長度為「2T」、「3T」、「4T、6T、8T」、「5T、7T、9T」 4種而設定。 69 201021037 <堡型> 第37圖顯示第3記錄波形。該第3記錄波形與多脈波形 策略之第1、2記錄波形不同,設定成記錄功率Pw之脈波間 的功率位準不降低至底值功率Pbw,而採取一定的中間功 率Pm之形狀(堡(castie)型策略)。以配置於前頭之初始脈波 (寬度Ttop)、配置於最後尾之末脈波(寬度Tip)、及配置於初 始脈波與末脈波之間之中間脈波(寬度Tmp)而構成。又,作 為有關記錄功率之參數,Pw為記錄功率、pm為中間功率、 Pc為冷卻功率(冷卻功率)、ps及pe為偏功率(可燒錄型:Ps 為間隔功率,可重寫型:pe為消去功率)。 用以記錄最短記號(2T)之記錄波形不包含末脈波與中 間脈波,用以記錄第二短記號(3T)之記錄波形不包含末脈 波,從用以記錄第三短記號(4T)以上的記錄記號之記錄波 形開始包含末脈波及中間脈波。又,(用以記錄3τ以上記錄 β己號之3己錄波形之)初始脈波的終了位置與中間脈波的開 始位置一致,(用以記錄4Τ以上記錄記號之記錄波形之)中 間脈波的終了位置與末脈波的開始位置—致。 又,堡型策略有數種形狀。具體而言,有堡形狀 (casttle-shape)、L 形狀(L_shape)、及單脈波形狀(Μ〇η〇 puhe-shape)。堡形狀,係以丨個脈波構成用以形成記錄記號 之記錄脈波’具有包含第一區間、第二區間、及第三區間 之形狀;前述第一區間係由前述記錄脈波之定 第-功率位準(記錄功率Pw)者,前述第三區_由前述第 一區間之終了位置設定較前述第一功率位準低之第二功率 201021037 位準(中間功率pm)者,前述第三區職由前述第二區間之 終了位置設定較前述第二功率位準高、且與前述第一功率 L 區 位準相比為相同功率位準(記錄功率Μ或低功率位準者 形狀係具有在堡形狀中,使第三區間之功率位準與第二= 間之功率位準蝴切狀者。單脈波形狀係具有在堡形狀 中’第H第二區間、及第三區間之功率位準全部相 同之形狀者。^ Also, the recording conditions classified by the above pattern table can also be recorded in the information reading medium β. In this way, it is necessary to determine the pattern table, which can be reduced by the type of information recording medium and the recording speed. X, in the case where the e-recording condition of the above-mentioned information medium is best described, the adjustment of the recording parameter can be deleted, or the target value of the edge shift in the above-described embodiment can be reduced to 0. The position can also be set according to the type and recording speed of the information recording media of each brand, or according to the 疋 pattern. For example, in the information recording reproduction I set PW': the storage target value. Moreover, since the information record of the new information recording medium can be correspondingly stored by storing the corresponding new :, :=: target value of the body: = in the rewritable memory. The x' corresponding to the new pair is the optimum two m values, which can be determined by reproducing the information recording and reproducing the recording marks formed by the parameters of the recorded and recorded parameters. For example, the case where the code of the short symbol length of 2 is equal to the state of the maximum probability decoding W2, 2, and the state of the shirt is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The formula _^ can be made in the case where the shortest mark length is 2 or 3 and the code and the equalization square are cut, the shortest mark length is 2 or 3, and the length is 3, etc. = C1, C1 , CG) and the shortest code - equalization method PR (C〇, C1, C2, cl, c〇m 65 201021037 shape. CO, Cl, C2 are arbitrary positive numbers. Again, the above embodiments are in each In the pattern table, although the symbols and intervals of the shortest symbol length are only classified in detail, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, 'the same can be applied to the shorter and shorter marks than the shortest mark length. It can be applied to longer marks and spaces. The information recording medium of the above embodiments is not limited to CDs, DVDs, BDs, etc., and can also be applied to magneto-optical media such as MO (Magneto-Optical Disc), and digital The recording code (〇 or 1) of the number is an information recording medium for recording information by changing the length _ degree or phase of the information formed by the polarity interval (the present embodiment is the recording mark and the interval). Part of the recording and reproducing device is used as an adjustment for information The recording condition of the recording pulse shape recorded in the information recording medium is adjusted, and the entire device can be manufactured as a one-wafer LSI (semiconductor integrated circuit) or a part thereof. Further, when a part of the recording and reproducing device is manufactured as one wafer In the case of LSI, the signal processing time for adjusting the recording parameters can be greatly shortened. Each part of the recording and reproducing device can be independently manufactured as an LSI. (Regarding the recording waveform) In the above embodiment, the recording pulse train is formed. The recording pulse wave has a multi-pulse waveform 'but a recording pulse wave of another waveform may be used. Hereinafter, the recording pulse wave of the present invention including the multi-pulse waveform may be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37. The recording of the information recording medium is carried out by following the predetermined modulation rules 'modulating the information to be recorded (user data or original data) to generate a plurality of recording modulation codes, illuminating the pulse-like beam, Forming a complex number 66 201021037 Record marks and intervals (interval between record marks and record marks), the complex record marks and intervals have corresponding corresponding complex The length of the modulation code is recorded. For the generation of the pulse wave beam according to which waveform, three examples are explained below. Any one of the 35th to 37th drawings is for convenience of explanation, and the shortest symbol is 2T ( Although T is the reference clock and the reference period of the modulation, the present invention is not limited thereto. In the description of Fig. 1, the length of the recording symbol and the interval is 2 Τ to 8 Τ, but the 35th to Figure 37 is a diagram containing 9 。. This 9 Τ is used as a pattern of sync code (synchronization code sequence). Usually, the data (original original data / binary data before modulation) S has been recorded in δ When recording a medium, it is divided into predetermined sizes, and the data divided into predetermined sizes is further divided into frames of a predetermined length, and a predetermined synchronization code/synchronization code sequence (frame synchronization area) is inserted for each frame. The data divided into frames is recorded as a sequence of modulated data codes (frame data area) according to a predetermined modulation rule consistent with the characteristics of the recording and reproducing signals of the recording medium. On the other hand, since the above-described predetermined modulation rule is not applied to the synchronization code/synchronization code sequence inserted between the frames, it is possible to include a pattern other than the code length which is restrained by the modulation rule. The synchronization code/synchronization code sequence is a sequence of reproduction processing when the data to be recorded is reproduced. As a predetermined modulation rule, for example, when the 1-7 modulation is performed, since the length of the symbol is limited to 2T to 8T, as the pattern including the synchronization code, the 1-7 modulation is not used. <Ν-1 strategy> Fig. 35 shows the first recording waveform. The second recording waveform is a multi-pulse type strategy, that is, including a plurality of pulse waves (multi-pulse waves), and the complex pulse waves are arranged in the first pulse wave (also referred to as an initial pulse wave, width Tt 〇p) ), arranged at the end of the most 67 201021037, the end of the pulse wave (width Tip), and the intermediate pulse wave (width Tmp) arranged between the initial pulse wave and the last pulse wave. Further, as a parameter relating to the recording power, Pw is the recording power, Pbw is the bottom power, Pe is the cooling power (cooling power), and Ps and Pe are the partial powers (burnable type: ps is the interval power, rewritable type) :Pe is the elimination power). Recording power? The rating can also be referred to as peak power pp. The bottom power Pbw can also be expressed as Pb. The recording waveform for recording the shortest mark (2T) does not include the last pulse and the intermediate pulse, and the recording waveform for recording the second short mark (3T) does not include the intermediate pulse. From the recording waveform for recording the third short mark (4T), the inter-phase pulse wave is included, and for every 1T increase, the pulse number of the intermediate pulse wave is also increased by one. One of the characteristics of the first recording waveform is that the number of pulse waves included in the recording waveform for recording the nT symbol (η is a natural number) is (η-1). - As shown below, various parameters can be set according to the length of the interval between the recording mark and the adjacent mark. First, for example, the rising position dTtop and the width Ttop of the initial pulse wave may be classified into three types: the length of the recording mark being "2T", "3T", or "4T or more", or the length of the preceding interval of the adjacent pulse is It is set to four types of "2", φ "3", "4", and "5" or more. Further, for example, the width of the pulse wave Tip can be classified into two types of "3T" and "4T or more". Further, for example, the end position (the partial power level: used to set the start positions of Ps and Pe) dTs for setting the cooling power level Pc may be classified into the length of the recording mark as "2T", "3T", " It is set by 3 types of 4T or more. <N/2 Strategy> Fig. 36 shows the second recording waveform. The second recorded waveform is also a multi-pulse 68 201021037 type strategy. The recording waveform for recording the shortest mark (2T) and the second short mark (3T) does not include the last pulse and the intermediate pulse, and records the recording waveforms of the third short mark (4Τ) and the fourth short mark (5Τ). Does not contain intermediate pulse waves. The intermediate pulse wave is included from the recording waveform for recording the fifth short mark (6Τ), and the number of pulse waves is increased by one for every 2Τ' intermediate pulse. The second recording waveform is characterized in that the number of pulse waves included in the recording waveform for recording the mT symbol (m is a natural number) is (m + 2). As shown below, various parameters can be classified and set according to the length of the recording mark. First, for example, the rising position dTtop and the width Ttop of the initial pulse wave can be classified into four types: the length of the recording mark is "2T", "3T", "4T, 6T, 8T", "5Τ, 7Τ, 9Τ". . Further, for example, the rising position dTmp of the intermediate pulse wave may be classified into two types of the lengths of the recording marks "6T, 8T" and "7T, 9T". Further, for example, the classification of the former can be made to coincide with the position of the reference clock, and the classification of the latter is offset by the reference clock position by T/2. Further, for example, the rising position dTlp and the width Tip of the end pulse wave may be classified into two types of lengths of "4T, 6T, 8T" and "5T, 7T, and 9T". Further, 'dT1P' may be made such that the classification of the former coincides with the reference clock position. The latter classification is offset by the reference clock position by T/2. Further, for example, the end position (the partial power level: used to set the start position of Ps and Pe) dTs for setting the cooling power level Pe may be classified into the length of the recording mark as "2T", "3T", " 4T, 6T, 8T", "5T, 7T, 9T" are set in 4 types. 69 201021037 <Fort type> Fig. 37 shows the third record waveform. The third recording waveform is different from the first and second recording waveforms of the multi-pulse waveform strategy, and is set such that the power level between the pulse waves of the recording power Pw is not lowered to the bottom power Pbw, but a shape of a certain intermediate power Pm is taken. (castie) type strategy). The initial pulse wave (width Ttop) disposed at the head, the last pulse wave (width Tip) disposed at the last end, and the intermediate pulse wave (width Tmp) disposed between the initial pulse wave and the last pulse wave are configured. Further, as a parameter relating to recording power, Pw is recording power, pm is intermediate power, Pc is cooling power (cooling power), and ps and pe are partial power (burnable type: Ps is interval power, rewritable type: Pe is to eliminate power). The recording waveform for recording the shortest mark (2T) does not include the last pulse and the intermediate pulse, and the recording waveform for recording the second short mark (3T) does not include the last pulse, and is used to record the third short mark (4T). The recording waveform of the above recording mark starts to include the last pulse wave and the intermediate pulse wave. Moreover, the end position of the initial pulse wave (which is used to record the 3rd recording waveform of the recorded value of 3τ or more) coincides with the start position of the intermediate pulse wave, and is used to record the intermediate pulse wave of the recording waveform of the recording mark of 4 or more. The final position is the same as the starting position of the last pulse. Also, the Fort type strategy has several shapes. Specifically, there are a casttle-shape, an L-shape, and a single-pulse shape (Μ〇η〇 puhe-shape). a shape of a fort, a recording pulse wave formed by a pulse wave for forming a recording mark has a shape including a first interval, a second interval, and a third interval; the first interval is determined by the aforementioned recording pulse wave - a power level (recording power Pw), wherein the third region _ is set by the second power 201021037 level (intermediate power pm) lower than the first power level by the end position of the first interval, the third The location of the second interval is higher than the foregoing second power level and is the same power level as the first power L region level (the recording power Μ or the low power level shape has In the shape of the fort, the power level of the third interval is matched with the power level between the second and the second. The single pulse shape has the power level of the second interval and the third interval in the fort shape. Those who are all in the same shape.
又,雖然在第37圖係使第一區間之功率位準與第三區 間之功率位準-致,以方便說明而不過於複雜,但亦可設 定成不同位準。在先前之說明中,設定成第一區間之功率 位準的脈波表示為初始脈波,設定成第二區間之功率位準 的脈波表示為中間脈波,設定成第三區間之功率位準的脈 波表示為末脈波’在以後之說明中,亦使用先前說明(初始 脈波、中間脈波、末脈波)之表示。 如下所示,亦可對應記錄記號與鄰接之間隔的長度而 分類設定各種參數。首先,例如,初始脈波的上升位置dTtop 與寬度Ttop亦可分類成記錄記號的長度為「2T」、「3T」、「4T 以上」3種,或/更例如,分類成鄰接之先行間隔的長度為 「2Τ」、「3Τ」、「4Τ以上」3種而設定。 又,例如,末脈波之寬度Tip亦可分類成記錄記號的長 度為「4T以上」1種而設定(包含末脈波之4T以上全部設定 為相同寬度)° 又,例如,用以設定冷卻功率位準Pc之開始位置dTc 亦可分類成記錄記號的長度為”丁一’厂斗丁一〜^丁以上」3 71 201021037 種而設定。 又,例如,用以設定冷卻功率位準Pc之終了位置(偏功 率位準:用以設定Ps&pe之開始位置)dTs亦可分類成記錄記 號的長度為^丁^^丁^”丁以上一丑種而設定。 為方便說明,上述可利用本發明之N_1策略、N/2策略、 及堡型之記錄脈波之波形之各參數的分類,與上述實施型 態之分類不同。例如,僅藉記錄記號的長度之分類、或僅 藉記錄記號的長度與鄰接於其之一邊之間隔的長度之組合 而分類。然而,上述實施型態之分類可合適地使用於該等 記錄脈波之波形。 具體而言,例如,如第22圖及第23圖所示,在N-1策略、 N/2策略、及堡型之記錄脈波之波形中,亦可「將用以調整 記錄記號的始端邊緣之記錄參數,以記錄記號:M⑴的長 度、與前方間隔S : (i-Ι)的長度之組合分類,當M⑴在預定 長度以下(例如最短記號)時,更進一步組合後方間隔:8〇+1) 的長度而分類,該S(i+1)的長度之分類係藉由s(i+1)在預定 長度以下(例如最短間隔)或較預定長度長而分類」。 亦或者是,例如’如第28圖及第29圖所示,在N-1策略、 N/2策略、及堡型之記錄脈波之波形中,亦可「將用以調整 記錄記號的終端邊緣之記錄參數,以記錄記號:M(i)的長 度、與後方間隔S : (i+Ι)的長度之組合分類,當M(i)在預定 長度以下(例如最短記號)時,更進一步組合前方間隔:8屮1} 的長度而分類,該SO·1)的長度之分類係藉由S(i-l)在預定 長度以下(例如最短間隔)或較預定長度長而分類」。 201021037 又,亦可藉由記錄密度(1層約25GB與1層約32GB及/或 33.4GB)與記錄媒體的種類(可燒錄型、可重寫型等),而使 此分類方法不同。 又,設定各脈波與設定各功率位準時,其位置或寬度 即便在Ν·1策略、N/2策略、及堡型之任一者之記錄脈波中, 亦可以Τ/16為早位進行調整。亦或者是,以更細之丁/32為 單位。又,亦可藉由記錄密度(〗層約25gb與1層約32GB及/ 或33.4GB)與§己錄媒體的種類(可燒錄型、可重寫型等),而 使該調整單位不同。由於可設定之解析度越小,越可微調 整記錄記號,所以在期望更高精度之記錄調整時,改變可 設定之解析度。因此,藉由對應記錄脈波設定之解析度(宜 為記錄脈波設定之解析度變小之設定)設定記錄脈波條 件,可更適切地形成記錄記號。 由與記錄速度之觀點,就該等記錄脈波之波形記錄波 形與記錄速度之關係而言,N/2策略之記錄波形較策略 之記錄波形適合高速記錄,堡型之記錄波形較N/2策略之記 錄波形適合高速記錄。這是因為,N/2策略之記錄波形較堡 塑之記錄波形的記錄功率pW2發光次數多,N_〗策略之呓 錄波形較N/2策略之記錄波形的記錄功率Pw之發光次數 多,亦即,由於脈波的上升時間與下降時間所需要之累積 變多,而影響高速處理。考慮到此點,於光碟儲存記錄條 件時,亦可如以下所示。 首先’儲存對應記錄速度:lx之記錄條件時,例如, 亦可以N-1策略之記錄波形之相關參數之儲存為必需,第2 73 201021037 記錄波形參數之相關參數之儲存為選擇。又,另外,記錄 速度:lx時’例如,亦可不套用第3記錄波形。 又’儲存對應記錄速度:2x之記錄條件時,例如,亦 可以N-1束略之§己錄波形之相關參數之儲存為選擇,n/2策 略之記錄波形之相關參數之儲存為選擇,堡型之記錄波形 之相關參數之儲存為選擇。又,另外,例如,亦可使N-1 策略之記錄波形之相關參數與N/2策略之記錄波形之相關 參數之至少一者之儲存為必需。 又’儲存對應§己錄速度:4x之記錄條件時,例如,亦 可以堡型之s己錄波形之相關參數之儲存為必需。又,另外, 記錄速度:4x時,例如,亦可不套用N-1策略及N/2策略之 記錄波形。 又’儲存對應記錄速度:6x之記錄條件時,例如,亦 可以堡型之δ己錄波形之相關參數之儲存為必需。又,另外, 記錄速度.6χ時’例如,亦可不套用策略及n/2策略之 記錄波形。 又’儲存對應記錄速度:8χ以上之記錄條件時,例如, 亦可以與4χ及6χ相同條件,亦即以堡型之記錄波形之相關 參數之儲存為必需,又,另外,記錄速度:6χ時,例如, 亦可不套用Ν-1策略及Ν/2策略之記錄波形。 又’關於上述記錄條件之儲存,在HTL(HightoLow : 記錄部之反射率較未記錄部之反射率低)的情形與 LTH(Low to High:記錄部之反射率較未記錄部之反射率高) 的情形,可儲存相同内容,亦可儲存不同内容。 201021037 x ’亦可對應記錄速度(記錄線速度)之設定,而設定記 i亲脈^皮條件。在同一光學條件中,當降低記錄速度而記錄 時’每單位面積之資訊量增加,記錄密度變高。然而,如 I己if $度變高,則容易受到前後記錄記號的熱量影響。因 此’藉由對應線速度之設定(宜為線速度降低之設定)而設定 記錄脈波條件,可更適切地形成記錄記號。 (關於藍光光碟) 作為可套用本發明之記錄媒體之一例,有藍光光碟(BD) 與其他規格之光碟,在此詳細說明BD。對應記錄膜的特 性’BD有可燒錄型·寫入一次型的bd-R、可重寫型的BD-RE 等類型。本發明在BD與其他規格之光碟的R(可燒錄型•寫 入一次型)、RE (可重寫型)之任一類型之記錄媒體皆可適 用。藍光光碟的主要光學常數與實體格式有揭示於ry小 一卜彳于4只夕読本」(才一厶社出版)與藍光協會的網頁 (http://www.blu-raydisc.com/)所揭示載錄之白皮書。 在BD ’使用波長約405nm(若使相對標準值4〇5nm之誤 差範圍的容許值為±5nm,則是400〜41 Onm)的雷射光及開口 數(NA : Numerical Aperture)約0.85(若使相對標準值0.85之 誤差範圍的容許值為±0 . 01,則是0.84〜0_86)的物鏡^ BD 的軌矩約0·32μπι(若使相對標準值0.320μιη之誤差範圍的容 許值為±0.010μιη,則是0.310〜0·330μηι) ’資訊記錄層設有1 層或2層。資訊記錄層之記錄面為由雷射光入射側之單面1 層或單面2層之構成,由BD之保護層表面至記錄面為止的 距離為75μιη〜ΙΟΟμηι。 75 201021037 記錄訊號的調變方式係利用17PP調變,所記錄之記號 之最短記號(2T記號:T為基準時脈之週期(藉由預定調變規 則記錄記號時之調變的基準週期))之記號長為0·149μηι(或 0.138μηι)(通道位元長:Τ為74.50nm(或69.00nm))。記錄容 量為單面單層25GB(或27GB)(更詳細而言為25.025GB(或 27.020GB))或單面2層50GB(或54GB)(更詳細而言為 50.050GB(或 54.040GB))。 通道時脈頻率在標準速度(BDlx)之轉送率為 66MHz(通道位元率66.000Mbit/s) ’在4倍速(BD4x)之轉送率 ® 為264MHz(通道位元率264.000Mbit/s),在6倍速(BD6x)之轉 送率為396MHz(通道位元率396_000Mbit/s),在8倍速(BD8x) 之轉送率為528MHz(通道位元率528.000Mbit/s)。 、 標準線速度(基準線速度,lx)為4.917m/sec(或4.554 _ m/sec)。2倍(2x)、4倍(4x)、6倍(6x)、及8倍(8x)之線速度分 別為 9.834m/sec 、19.668m/sec 、29.502m/sec 、及 39_336m/sec。雖然較標準線速度高之線速度一般為標準線 速度的正整數倍,但並不限定於整數,亦可為正實數倍。 ® 又,亦可定義為0.5倍(0.5x)等較標準線速度慢之線速度。 又,上述之各條件已在進行商品化,主要是有關1層約 25GB(或約27GB)之1層或2層之BD者。為了使BD之記錄容 量提高,1層的記錄容量約32GB或約33.4GB之高密度BD與 層數為3層或4層之BD亦在檢討中。以下對如此之BD的例子 進行說明。 <資訊記錄層之多層化> 76 201021037 當選用雷射讀賴層(覆蓋層)丨狀射%再纽/或記 錄貝之單面碟片之構成時,要使資訊記錄層為2層以上, 必須在基板與保護層之間設置複數的資訊記錄層。如此之 多層碟片的構成例顯示於第38圖。第38圖所示之光碟具 有(η+1)層之資訊記錄層以上之整數)。具體而言, 光碟從田射光200入射側之表面依序層積有覆蓋層5〇1、 (η+1)枚資訊記錄層(Ln〜L〇層)5〇2、及基板細。又在(η+ι) 0 枚之各資訊記錄層502之間,插入有發揮作為光學緩衝材之 中間層503。亦即,在由光入射面相隔預定距離之最内側位 置(離光源最遠之位置)設置基準層(L〇),由基準層⑽朝光 , 入射面側層積資訊記錄層(LI、L2.....Ln)而增加層。 在此,與單層碟片之情形粕比,亦可使多層碟片之由 ’ 光入射面至基準層L〇的距離與單層碟片之由光入射面至資 訊記錄層的距離幾乎相同(例如〇.lmm程度)。藉由如此無關 層數而使至最深層(最遠層)為止的距離為一定(亦即,與單 Φ 層碟片情況幾乎相同距離)’可無關單層或多層而確保有關 對基準層之存取的互換性。又,可抑制伴隨層數增加而增 加之傾斜影響。可抑制傾斜影響的増加,是因為最内層雖 然會最受到傾斜影響,但藉由使到最内層之距離與單層碟 片幾乎相同距離,即便層數增加,到最内層之距離亦不會 増加。 又,關於光點的行進方向(或稱為循軌方向、螺旋方 向),可以為同向•路徑,亦可為反向•路徑。同向•路徑 系在所有資訊記錄層中,光點的行進方向相同。亦即,光 77 201021037 點的行進方向在全資訊記錄層係由内周朝外周的方向,或 在全資訊記錄層由外周朝内周的方向行進。 —方面,反向•路徑係在某資訊記錄層與鄰接該資訊 記錄層之資訊記錄層,光點的行進方向相反。亦即,當基 準層(L0)之光點的杆進方向為由内周往外周之方向時,資 訊記錄層L1之光點的行進方向為由外周往内周之方向,資 訊記錄層L2之光點的行進方向為由内周往外周之方向。亦 即,光點的行進方向在資訊記錄層Lm(m為〇及偶數)為由内 周往外周之方向,在資訊記錄層Lm+1為由外周往内周之方 參 向。亦或者是’在資訊記錄層Lm(m為0及偶數)為由外周往 内周之方向,在資訊記錄層Lm+1為由内周往外周之方向。 保護層(覆蓋層)的厚度設定成較薄,伴隨有提高開口數 、 NA ’縮短焦點距離,或抑制傾斜所造成之光點歪斜的影 響。開口數ΝΑ相對於在CD之0.45、DVD之0.65,在BD係設 定為約0.85。例如,在資訊記錄媒體的總厚度1.2mm程度 中’保護層的厚度亦可為10~200μιη。更具體而言,在1.1mm 程度的基板,單層碟片可設置0.1mm程度的透明保護層,2 ® 層碟片亦可於0.075mm程度的保護層設置0.025mm程度的 中間層(Spacer Layer)。 <1層至4層之各構成例> 在此,第39圖顯示單層碟片之構成例,第40圖顯示2層 碟片之構成例,第41圖顯示3層碟片之構成例,第42圖顯示 4層碟片之構成例。如前述所示,使從光照射面至基準層L0 為止的距離為一定時,在任一碟片中,碟片之總厚度皆為 78 201021037 約1.2mm(包含標示印刷等時,宜為l.4〇mm以下),基板500 之厚度為約1.1mm。又,從光照射面至基準層L0為止的距 離為約0.1mm。在第39圖所示之單層碟片(在第38圖中n=〇 的情形)中’覆蓋層5011的厚度約0.1mm。在第40圖所示之2 層碟片(在第38圖中n=l的情形)中,覆蓋層5012的厚度約 0.075mm,中間層5032的厚度約〇.〇25mm。又,在第41圖之 3層碟片(在第38圖中n=2的情形)與第42圖之4層碟片(在第 38圖中n=3的情形)中’覆蓋層5014的厚度及/或中間層5304 的厚度亦可更薄。 又,在使用具有如此高NA之物鏡之光學頭之記錄再生 裝置中,因由碟片之光照射表面至資訊記錄層為止的厚度 而產生之球面像差等像差,對收斂於資訊記錄層上之雷射 光的品質大有影響。因此,設置有修正因厚度產生之像差 的機構。 像差修正機構為了修正因由光資訊記錄媒體之保護層 表面至記錄再生資訊之資訊記錄層為止的厚度而產生之球 面像差等像差成份,而給予像差以抵消在各資訊記錄層產 生之像差成份。該像差修正機構之光學設計原先是用以縮 小單層構造媒體之資訊記錄層之像差,但亦有考慮到記錄 再生2層構造之資訊記錄媒體的像差。設計上的最小像差, 係設定在由保護層表面約80|1111至90|1111程度。因此。將記錄 再生光收斂於與最小像差位置不同厚度之資訊記錄層時, 而要控制像差修正機構’設定各資訊記錄層之像差修正值 以進行修正。 79 201021037 <BD的實體構成> 第43圖顯示可套用本發明之光碟510的實體構成。圓盤 狀的光碟510形成有例如同心圓狀或螺旋狀之多數軌道 511,各軌道512形成細分之多數區塊扇區。又,如後述所 示,在各軌道512係以預先決定尺寸之區塊513為單位記錄 資料。實際上,資料係作為將應記錄之資訊調變而得之由 複數記錄記號及分別設於複數記錄記號之間的複數間隔所 構成的資料列而記錄於軌道。 光碟 510 於内周侧具有 PIC(Permanent Information & Control data)區域514及 OPC(Optimum Power Control)區域 515。OPC區域515係於記錄使用者資料前,使用在進行測 試記錄以用以尋求最適合碟片或各資訊記錄層之記錄功率 與記錄脈波列的條件之區域。亦可稱為學習區域。又,亦 為產生光碟裝置個別的不一致、急速的溫度改變、粉塵與 塵埃等之附著等的環境變化時,用以調整記錄功率與記錄 脈波列之改變量等,而進行測試記錄之區域。pic區域514 係再生專用區域,藉由高速調變溝而記錄碟片管理資訊。 碟片官理資訊§己錄有哥求最佳記錄功率所需要之〇PC參數 與寫入策略類型、雷射脈波之產生時序及長度等(於第 第2實施型態所說明之記錄條件)的建議值、記錄線速度、 再生功率、型號等。 光碟510係資訊記錄層1層之記錄容量較習知之光碟 (例如25GB之BD)擴張者。記錄容量之擴張係'藉由調高記錄 線密度而實現’例如,藉由使記錄在柄之記錄記號之記 80 201021037 號長較短而實現。在此,「調高記錄線密度」係意指使通道 位元長變短。該通道位元為與基準時脈之週期τ(藉由預定 之調變規則而記錄記號時之調變的基準週期τ)相當之長 度。又,光碟510亦可為多層者。只是,以下為了方便說明, 僅板及1個資訊記錄層。又,設置複數之資訊記錄層時,即 便設置於各資訊記錄層之軌道的寬度相同,亦可使各層之 記號長相異,且於同一層中之記號長一樣,藉此,可使各 層之記錄線密度不同。 軌道512 ’係依資料之記錄單位64kB(千位元)而分成區 塊513,並依順序分配區塊位址。區塊513可分割成預定長 度的副區塊,以3個副區塊構成1區塊。副區塊係依由前至 後的順序分配〇至2為止的副區塊號碼。 <記錄密度> 接下來’使用第44圖、第45圖、第46圖、及第47圖說 明記錄密度。 第44圖顯示25GB的BD之例子。BD之雷射光200之波長 為 405nm、物鏡220之開口數(Numerical Aperture : NA)為 0.85。 與DVD相同,BD亦是將記錄資料記錄成在光碟的軌道 512上物理變化之記號列520、521。在該記號列中長度最短 者為「最短記號」。在圖式中,記號521為最短記號。 25GB記錄容量時的最短記號521之物理長度為 0.149μιη。這相當於DVD的約1/2.7,即便改變光學系統的波 長參數(405nm)與NA參數(0.85),提高雷射之解析度,亦接 81 201021037 近光束可識別之記錄記號的界限,亦即接近光學解析度之 界限。 第46圖顯示將光束照射在記錄於軌道512上之記號列 的樣子。藉由上述光學系統參數,於BD之光點210的直徑 為約〇·39μηι程度。在不改變光學系統的構造之情況下而提 高記錄線密度時,由於記錄記號相對光點21〇的點徑變小, 再生之解析度會變差。 例如’第45圖顯示較25GB的BD更高記錄密度之光碟的 例子。於該碟片亦為雷射2〇〇的波長4〇5nm、物鏡220的開口 β 數(Numerical Aperture : ΝΑ)0·85。該碟片之記號列524、525 中,最短記號525的物理長度為0.1115μιη。與第44圖相比, 由於點徑同樣是約〇·39μπι,而記錄記號相對地變小且記號 , 間隔亦變狹窄,所以再生之解析度變差。 以光束再生記錄記號時的再生訊號之振幅,隨著記錄 記號變短而降低,在光學解析度之界限變為該記錄記號 的週期之倒數稱為空間頻率,空間頻率與訊號振幅之關係 稱為OTF(Optical Transfer Function)。訊號振幅隨著空間頻 粵 率變高而幾乎直線地下降。訊號振幅變為零的再生之界限 頻率稱為OTF截止(cutoff)。 第47圖的圖表顯示25GB記錄容量之BD的OTF與最短 記錄記號之關係。BD之最短記號的空間頻率為相對〇TF截 止80%左右,接近〇TF截止。又,可發現最短記號之再生訊 號的振幅亦變成可檢測之最大振幅之約10%左右,非常地 小。當BD的最短記號之空間頻率與〇TF截止非常接近時, 82 201021037 亦即,再生振幅幾乎未出現時的記錄容量,在bd相當於約 31GB。若最短記號之再生訊號的頻率係在〇tf截止頻率附 近或為超出其之頻率時’則可能超過雷射解析度之界限, 再生訊號之再生振幅變小,為SN比急速劣化之區域。 因此,可假定第45圖之高記錄密度光碟之記錄線密 度,係再生訊號之最短記號之頻率在〇TF截止頻率附近(包 含在OTF截止頻率以下但未大幅低於〇TF截止頻率之情形) 至OTF戴止頻率以上的情形。 第48圖的圖表顯示最短記號(2T)之空間頻率較OTF截 止頻率向且2T再生訊號之振幅為〇時的訊號振幅與空間頻 率之關係的一例。在第48圖中,最短記號長2T之空間頻率 為OTF截止頻率的1 12倍。 <波長與開口數與記號長之關係> 高記錄密度光碟之波長與開口數與記號長/間隔長之 關係如以下所示。 以TMnm表示最短記號長,以TSnm表示最短間隔長, 並以’’P”表示(最短記號長+最短間隔長)時,p為 (TM+TS)nm。17調變的情形下,p=2T+2T=4T。使用雷射波 長 λ (405nm±5nm,亦即4〇〇〜410nm)、開口數ΝΑ(0.85±0.01 亦即0.84〜0.86)、及最短記號+最短間隔長Ρ(17調變的情形 下’由於最短長為2Τ,所以ρ=2Τ+2Τ=4Τ) 3個參數的情形 下’若基準Τ縮小至滿足以下之不等式,則最短記號之空間 頻率超過OTF截止頻率。 Ρ ^ λ /2ΝΑ 83 201021037 藉由以下式子,可求得相當於NA=〇85、λ=4〇5時之 〇TF截止頻率之基準Τ。又,當滿足ρ> λ/2ΝΑ時最短記 號之空間頻率較OTF截止頻率低。 τ = 405/(2x0.85)74 = 59.558nm 如此,即便只提昇記錄線密度,也會因光學解析度之 界限而使SN比劣化。因此,以系統餘裕狀_,資訊記 錄層之多層化所造成的SN比劣化,會有不可接受的時候。 特別是如上述所示,最短記錄記號之頻率從超過〇71?截止 頻率附近開始,SN比明顯劣化。 φ 以上,比較最短s己號之再生訊號的頻率與〇tf載止頻 率而說明了記錄線密度。當BD進而更高密度化時,由第二 短記號(第三短記號(第四短記號以上之記錄記號))之再生 _ 訊號之頻率與OTF截止頻率的關係,依據與上述相同之原 . 理,可a又疋對應個別之5己錄密度(記錄線密度、記錄容量)。 <記錄密度及層數> 在此,具有波長405nm、開口數〇·85等規格之6£)之1層 的具體s己錄容量,當最短記號之空間頻率在〇TF截止頻率 參 附近時,可假定為例如,約29GB(例如,29.0GB±0.5GB或 29GB±1GB等)或在其以上,或約3〇GB(例如,3〇.〇GB±0.5GB 或30GB±1GB等)或在其以上,或約31GB(例如,31.0GB土 0.5GB或31GB±1GB等)或在其以上,或約32gb(例如, 32.0GB±0.5GB或32GB±1GB等)或在其以上等。 又’當最短記號之空間頻率在OTF截止頻率以上時,i 層之記錄容量’可假定為例如,約32GB(例如,32.0GB土 84 201021037 0.5GB或32GB±1GB等)或在其以上,或約33GB(例如, 33.0GB ± 0.5GB或33GB ± 1GB等)或在其以上,或約 33_3GB(例如,33.3GB±0.5GB或33.3GB±1GB等)或在其以 上,或約 33.4GB(例如,33.4GB±0.5GB 或 33.4GB±1GB 等) 或在其以上,或約34GB(例如,34.0GB±0.5GB或34GB±1GB 等)或在其以上,或約35GB(例如,35.0GB±0.5GB或35GB士 1GB等)或在其以上等。 特別是當記錄密度為約33.3GB時,可以3層實現約 100GB(99.9GB)之記錄容量,為約33.4GB時可以3層實現 100GB以上(100.2GB)之記錄容量。這與4層25GB之BD的記 錄容量幾乎相等。例如,記錄密度為33GB時,33x3=99GB 與100GB的差為1GB(1GB以下),記錄密度為34GB時, 34x3=102GB與100GB的差為2GB(2GB以下),記錄密度為 33.3GB時,33.3x3=99.9GB與 100GB的差為0.1GB(0.1GB以 下),記錄密度為33.4GB時,33.4x3=100.2GB與100GB的差 為 0.2GB(0.2GB以下), 又,若大幅地擴張記錄密度,則如先前所述,因最短 記號之再生特性的影響,精密再生將變困難。因此,要抑 制記錄密度之大幅擴張,且實現100GB以上之記錄密度, 約33.4GB為現實方案。 在此,產生了要使光碟之構成為1層25GB的4層構造或 1層33〜34GB的3層構造之選項。多層化伴隨著各資訊記錄 層之再生訊號振幅的低下(SN比之劣化)與多層漫射光(來 自鄰接之資訊記錄層的訊號)的影響等。因此,藉由選擇 85 201021037 33〜34GB的3層構造而非25GB的4層構造,可一面極力地抑 制如此漫射光的影響,一面以較少的層數(非4層而為3層), 實現約100GB。因此,想一面極力地避免多層化一面實現 100(3之碟片的製造者,可選擇33〜34GB的3層化。另一方 面,想保持習知之格式(記錄密度25GB)而實現約1〇〇郎之 碟片的製造者,可選擇25GB的4層化。如此,具有不同目 的之製造者可藉由個別不同之構成,實現個別之目的,可 賦予碟片設計之自由度。 又’若使1層之記錄密度在30〜32GB程度,則3層碟片 無法達到100GB(90〜96GB程度)’ 4層碟片可實現120GB以 上。其中,若使記錄密度為約32GB ’則4層碟片可實現約 128GB之記錄容量。該128之數字亦為電腦方便處理之整合 成2的平方值(2的7次方)之數值。而且,與以3層碟片實現約 100GB之記錄密度相比起來,此處之最短記號之再生特性 較不嚴苛。 由此’在擴張記錄密度方面,設計複數種類之記錄密 度(例如約32GB與約33.4GB等),並藉由複數種類之記錄密 度與層數之組合,可給予碟片製造者設計之自由度。例如, 對於想抑制多層化的影響並增大容量之製造者,可給予製 造藉由3層33〜34GB所成之約100GB的3層碟片之選項,對於 想抑制再生特性的影響並增大容量之製造者,可給予製造 藉由4層3〇〜32GB所成之約120GB以上的4層碟片之選項。 即使在BD採用任一構成,為了調整記錄於BD之記錄記 號的記錄條件,宜可使用本發明。此時,亦可對應資訊記 201021037 錄媒體之資却^ & ^ D D、条層的數量或資訊記錄層間的距離,而使 δ己錄脈波條件不同。 上述所不,即便資訊記錄層的數量變多,由於離光 =遠之資訊記錄層以)的位置不變所以隨著資訊記 數量變多,資訊記錄層間的距離變短,層間交擾增 一二,再生訊號會局部地或整體地變動。該變動在同 二、$層中不依存於記錄記號之長度。然而,記錄記 號越短則相對地變動所造成之影響越大。因此記錄記號越 短則e錄記號之調整精度宜越高。 :而將本發明套用至多層BD時,如對應資訊記錄媒 、訊。己錄層的數量或資訊記錄層間的距離而設定記錄 脈波條件,可形成更適切之記錄記號。又,若資訊記錄層 的數量變多,則需要降低各資訊記錄層之反射率。因此, 反射率低的情形下亦可套用本發明。 又,亦可對應記錄資訊記錄層用之記錄功率設定範圍 而沒义記錄脈波條件。峰值功率等之記錄功率設定範圍, 可對應資訊記錄媒體之資訊記錄層的層數而改變。這是因 為必須隨著層數的不同而改變通過資訊記錄層之雷射光 的強度。以同—速度進行記錄時,記錄功率越大則由雷射 之響應特性之記錄不均會變大。從而,記錄功率越大則 宜更高精度地進行記錄調整。 例如,冑包含2層資訊記錄層之資訊記錄媒體的設定功 率值之上限,可設定成較對包含i層資訊記錄層之資訊記錄 媒體的設定功率值之上限高。同樣地,對包含3層資訊記錄 87 201021037 層之資訊記錄媒體的設定功率值之上限,可設定成較對包 含2層資訊記錄層之資訊記錄媒體的設定功率值之上= 高;對包含4層資訊記錄層之資訊記錄媒體的設定功率值之义 上限,可設定成較對包含3層資訊記錄層之資訊記錄媒體的 設定功率值之上限高。 從而,將本發明套用至多層BD時,如對應資訊記錄媒 體之記錄功率設定範圍而設定記錄脈波條件,可形成更適 切之記錄記號。 [產業上之可利用性] 0 本發月在藉由雷射光與電磁力等而記錄資料訊號之 各種資訊記錄媒體例如DVD_RA]V[、BD-RE、或其他資訊記 錄媒體中,可利用於對前述資訊記錄媒體進行記錄再生t , 記錄再生裝置例如DVD驅動器、DVD記錄器、bd記錄器、 與其他機械之記錄動作等亦可套用在其他用途。 【圖式簡單說明】 [第1(a)〜1⑷圖μ兒B月用以形成包含記錄記號及間隔之 資料列的記錄脈波波形及記錄功率之圖。 〇 [第2(a)〜2(c)圖]說明記錄脈波形狀例之圖。 [第3圖]說明習知記錄控制裝置之圖。 [第4圖]說明習知記錄參數表之圖。 [第5圖]說明記錄記號及間隔之時間序列之圖。 [第6圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之由rll〇,7)記錄碼與 等化方式PR( 1,2,2,2,1)所決定之狀態遷移規則之圖。 [第7圖]顯示對應第6圖之狀態遷移規則之格子圖。 88 201021037 [第8圖]顯示PR12221ML之狀態遷移列圖案之圖。 [第9圖]顯示PR12221ML之狀態遷移列圖案之圖。 [第10圖]顯示PR12221ML之狀態遷移列圖案之圖。 [第11圖]顯示第8圖所示之PR等化理想波形的一例之 圖。 [第12圖]顯示第9圖所示之P R等化理想波形的一例之 圖。 [第13圖]顯示第10圖所示之PR等化理想波形的一例之 圖。 [第14圖]使用PR12221ML方式之訊號評價裝置之說明 圖。 [第15圖]顯示卩11(1,2,2,2,1)]^^之14檢測圖案之差分度 量之各圖案詳細分類之圖。 [第16圖]顯示PR(1,2,2,2,1)ML之12A檢測圖案之差分 度量之各圖案詳細分類之圖。 [第17圖]顯示卩11(1,2,2,2,1)]^[之128檢測圖案之差分 度量之各圖案詳細分類之圖。 [第18圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之記錄參數之圖案表。 [第19(a)〜19(p)圖]說明對應第18圖所示之圖案表之記 錄脈波之圖。 [第20圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之記錄參數之其他圖 案表。 [第21(a)〜21(p)圖]說明對應第20圖所示之圖案表之記 錄脈波之圖。 89 201021037 [第22圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之記錄參數之其他圖 案表。 [第23(a)〜23(p)圖]說明對應第22圖所示之圖案表之記 錄脈波之圖。 [第24圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之記錄參數之其他圖 案表。 [第25(a)〜25(p)圖]說明對應第24圖所示之圖案表之記 錄脈波之圖。 [第26圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之記錄參數之其他圖 案表。 [第27(a)〜27(p)圖]說明對應第26圖所示之圖案表之記 錄脈波之圖。 [第28圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之記錄參數之其他圖 案表。 [第29(a)〜29(p)圖]說明對應第28圖所示之圖案表之記 錄脈波之圖。 [第30圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之記錄參數之其他圖 案表。 [第31(a)〜31(p)圖]說明對應第30圖所示之圖案表之記 錄脈波之圖。 [第32圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之記錄參數之其他圖 案表。 [第33(a)〜33(p)圖]說明對應第32圖所示之圖案表之記 錄脈波之圖。 201021037 [第34圖]顯示本發明之實施型態之資訊記錄再生裝置 之方塊圖。 [第35圖]顯示可在本發明使用之記錄脈波波形的一例 之圖。 [第36圖]顯示可在本發明使用之記錄脈波波形的其他 例之圖。 [第37圖]顯示可在本發明使用之記錄脈波波形的其他 例之圖。 ® [第38圖]顯示可套用本發明之資訊記錄媒體之構成例 之模式圖。 [第39圖]顯示單層之資訊記錄媒體之構成之模式圖。 • [第40圖]顯示2層之資訊記錄媒體之構成之模式圖。 - [第41圖]顯示3層之資訊記錄媒體之構成之模式圖。 [第42圖]顯示4層之資訊記錄媒體之構成之模式圖。 [第43圖]顯示資訊記錄媒體之物理構成之模式圖。 [第44圖]顯示雷射光束之點與記錄於軌道之記號的模 9 式圖。 [第45圖]顯示雷射光束之點與記錄於軌道之記號的其 他模式圖。 [第46圖]顯示將雷射光束照射在記錄於軌道上之資料 列的樣子之模式圖。 [第47圖]顯示OTF與最短記錄記號之關係的圖表。 [第48圖]顯示OTF與最短記錄記號之關係的另一圖表。 【主要元件符號說明】 91 201021037 1.. .資訊記錄媒體 2.. .光學頭 3.. .前置放大器部 4.. .AGC 部 5.. .波形等化部 6.. . A/D變換部 7.. .PLL 部 8.. .PR等化部 9.. .最大概率解碼部 10.. .邊緣移位檢測部 11…記錄圖案產生部 12.. .記錄補償部 13.. .雷射驅動部 14.. .記錄功率設定部 15.. .資訊記錄控制部 16.. .記錄補償參數決定部 100.. .資訊記錄再生裝置 101.. .記錄控制部 102…再生訊號處理部 200.. .雷射光 201.. .峰值功率 202.. .底值功率 203…冷卻功率 204.. .間隔功率 205.. .驟冷位準 210.. .光點 500.. .基板 501.. .覆蓋層 502.. .資訊記錄層 503.. .中間層 510.. .光碟 511.. .多數軌道 512.. .軌道 513.. .區塊 514.. .PIC 區域 515.. .0.C 區域 520、521...記號列 701、 704、707…圖案檢測部 702、 705、708...差分度量運算 部 703、 706、709…記憶部Further, although in Fig. 37, the power level of the first section and the power level of the third zone are made, for convenience of explanation and not too complicated, they may be set to different levels. In the foregoing description, the pulse wave set to the power level of the first section is represented as the initial pulse wave, and the pulse wave set to the power level of the second section is represented as the intermediate pulse wave, and the power bit set to the third interval is set. The quasi-pulse wave is expressed as the end pulse wave. In the following description, the expressions of the previous description (initial pulse wave, intermediate pulse wave, and end pulse wave) are also used. As shown below, various parameters can be classified and set in accordance with the length of the interval between the recording mark and the adjacent one. First, for example, the rising position dTtop and the width Ttop of the initial pulse wave may be classified into three types of the length of the recording mark as "2T", "3T", or "4T or more", or/or, for example, classified into adjacent leading intervals. The length is set to three types of "2", "3", and "4" or more. Further, for example, the width of the end pulse wave Tip can be classified into one type of the recording symbol length "4T or more" and set (including all the 4T or more of the end pulse wave set to the same width). Further, for example, for setting the cooling The start position dTc of the power level Pc can also be classified into the length of the record mark as "Ding Yi 'factory Ding Yi ~ ^ Ding or above" 3 71 201021037. Further, for example, the end position for setting the cooling power level Pc (the partial power level: used to set the starting position of Ps & pe) dTs can also be classified into the length of the recording mark as ^丁^^丁^" For convenience of explanation, the classification of each parameter of the waveform of the recording pulse wave which can utilize the N_1 strategy, the N/2 strategy, and the fort type of the present invention is different from the classification of the above embodiment. For example, Classification is based only on the classification of the length of the record mark, or only by the combination of the length of the record mark and the length of the interval adjacent to one of the sides. However, the classification of the above embodiment can be suitably used for the record pulse waves. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, in the waveforms of the N-1 strategy, the N/2 strategy, and the recording pulse of the fort type, it may also be used to adjust the recording mark. The recording parameters of the beginning edge are classified by the combination of the length of the record: M(1) and the length of the front interval S: (i-Ι). When M(1) is below a predetermined length (for example, the shortest mark), the rear interval is further combined: 8〇+1) For classification, the classification of the length of the S(i+1) is classified by s(i+1) below a predetermined length (e.g., the shortest interval) or longer than a predetermined length. Or, for example, as shown in Figs. 28 and 29, in the waveforms of the N-1 strategy, the N/2 strategy, and the recording waveform of the fort type, the terminal for adjusting the recording mark may also be used. The edge recording parameter is classified by the combination of the length of the record mark: M(i) and the length of the rear interval S: (i+Ι), and when M(i) is below a predetermined length (for example, the shortest mark), further The classification is based on the length of the front interval: 8屮1}, and the classification of the length of the SO·1) is classified by S(il) below a predetermined length (for example, the shortest interval) or longer than a predetermined length. 201021037 Further, this classification method can be made different by the recording density (about 25 GB for one layer and about 32 GB and/or 33.4 GB for one layer) and the type of recording medium (burnable type, rewritable type, etc.). In addition, when setting each pulse wave and setting each power level, the position or width can be Τ/16 as the early position even in the recording pulse of either the Ν·1 strategy, the N/2 strategy, or the Fort type. Make adjustments. Or, in a finer case / 32 units. Moreover, the adjustment unit can be made different by the recording density (about 25 gb for the layer and about 32 GB and/or 33.4 GB for the first layer) and the type of the recorded media (burnable type, rewritable type, etc.). . Since the smaller the resolution that can be set, the finer the recording mark can be finely adjusted, the resolution that can be set is changed when a more precise recording adjustment is desired. Therefore, by setting the recording pulse condition corresponding to the resolution of the recording pulse wave setting (it is preferable to set the resolution of the recording pulse wave setting), the recording mark can be formed more appropriately. From the viewpoint of the recording speed, in terms of the relationship between the waveform recording waveform of the recording pulse wave and the recording speed, the recording waveform of the N/2 strategy is suitable for high-speed recording compared with the recording waveform of the strategy, and the recording waveform of the Fort type is N/2. The recorded waveform of the strategy is suitable for high speed recording. This is because the recording waveform of the N/2 strategy is more than the recording power pW2 of the recording waveform of the Fort, and the recording waveform of the N_〗 strategy is more than the recording power of the recording waveform of the N/2 strategy. That is, since the accumulation of the pulse wave rise time and the fall time is required, the high speed processing is affected. With this in mind, when recording conditions on a disc, it can also be as shown below. First, when the recording condition corresponding to the recording speed: lx is stored, for example, the storage of the relevant parameters of the recording waveform of the N-1 strategy is necessary, and the storage of the relevant parameters of the waveform parameters recorded by the 2 73 201021037 is selected. Further, in addition, when the recording speed is 1x, for example, the third recording waveform may not be applied. In addition, when storing the corresponding recording speed: 2x recording conditions, for example, the storage of the relevant parameters of the waveform of the N-1 bundle can be selected as the selection, and the storage of the relevant parameters of the recorded waveform of the n/2 strategy is selected. The storage of the relevant parameters of the record waveform of the Fort type is selected. Further, for example, it is also necessary to store at least one of the correlation parameter of the recording waveform of the N-1 strategy and the correlation parameter of the recording waveform of the N/2 strategy. In addition, when the storage condition corresponding to the § recording speed: 4x is stored, for example, the storage of the relevant parameters of the s-recorded waveform of the fort type may be necessary. Further, when the recording speed is 4x, for example, the recording waveform of the N-1 strategy and the N/2 strategy may not be applied. Further, when storing the corresponding recording speed: 6x recording condition, for example, it is also necessary to store the relevant parameters of the δ-recorded waveform of the fort type. Further, in addition, when the recording speed is 6 χ, for example, the recording waveform of the strategy and the n/2 strategy may not be applied. In addition, when storing the recording speed corresponding to the recording speed of 8 χ or more, for example, the same conditions as 4 χ and 6 , can be used, that is, the storage of the relevant parameters of the recording waveform of the fort type is necessary, and in addition, the recording speed is 6 χ. For example, the recorded waveforms of the Ν-1 strategy and the Ν/2 strategy may not be applied. Further, regarding the storage of the above recording conditions, the HTL (HightoLow: the reflectance of the recording portion is lower than the reflectance of the unrecorded portion) and the LTH (Low to High: the reflectance of the recording portion is higher than that of the unrecorded portion) In the case of the same content, you can store the same content and store different content. 201021037 x ’ can also be set according to the setting of recording speed (recording line speed). In the same optical condition, the amount of information per unit area increases as the recording speed is lowered and the recording density becomes high. However, if I have become high, it is susceptible to the heat of the before and after recording marks. Therefore, the recording pulse condition can be formed more appropriately by setting the recording pulse condition by setting the line speed (which is preferable to set the line speed). (About Blu-ray Disc) As an example of a recording medium to which the present invention can be applied, there are Blu-ray Disc (BD) and other specifications of optical discs, and BD will be described in detail herein. Corresponding to the characteristics of the recording film BD is of a burnable type, a write-once type bd-R, a rewritable type BD-RE, and the like. The present invention is applicable to any type of recording medium of R (burnable type/write once) and RE (rewritable type) of BD and other optical discs. The main optical constants and physical formats of Blu-ray discs are revealed in the ry xiao yi 彳 4 4 4 4 4 4 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才 才Reveal the white papers that are included. In BD', the wavelength of the laser light and the number of openings (NA: Numerical Aperture) are about 0.85 when the wavelength is about 405 nm (the allowable value of the error range of 4 〇 5 nm for the relative standard value is ±5 nm) is about 0.85. The allowable value of the error range of the standard value of 0.85 is ±0. 01, which is 0.84~0_86). The track of the objective lens BD is about 0·32μπι (if the tolerance value of the relative standard value of 0.320μηη is ±0.010) Μιη, is 0.310~0·330μηι) 'The information recording layer is provided with 1 or 2 layers. The recording surface of the information recording layer is composed of one layer of one side or two layers of one side of the incident side of the laser light, and the distance from the surface of the protective layer of the BD to the recording surface is 75 μm to ΙΟΟμηι. 75 201021037 The modulation signal is modulated by 17PP, and the shortest mark of the recorded mark (2T mark: T is the period of the reference clock (the reference period of the modulation when the mark is recorded by the predetermined modulation rule)) The mark length is 0·149 μηι (or 0.138 μηι) (channel bit length: Τ is 74.50 nm (or 69.00 nm)). Recording capacity is single-sided single layer 25GB (or 27GB) (more specifically 25.025GB (or 27.020GB)) or single-sided 2 layer 50GB (or 54GB) (more specifically 50.050GB (or 54.040GB)) . The channel clock frequency has a transfer rate of 66MHz at standard speed (BDlx) (channel bit rate 66.000Mbit/s) 'Transfer rate at 4x speed (BD4x) is 264MHz (channel bit rate 264.000Mbit/s), The 6x speed (BD6x) transfer rate is 396MHz (channel bit rate 396_000Mbit/s), and the 8x speed (BD8x) transfer rate is 528MHz (channel bit rate 528.000Mbit/s). The standard line speed (reference speed, lx) is 4.917m/sec (or 4.554 _ m/sec). The linear velocities of 2x (2x), 4x (4x), 6x (6x), and 8x (8x) are 9.834m/sec, 19.668m/sec, 29.502m/sec, and 39_336m/sec, respectively. Although the linear velocity higher than the standard linear velocity is generally a positive integer multiple of the standard linear velocity, it is not limited to an integer, and may be a positive real multiple. ® can also be defined as a linear speed slower than the standard line speed of 0.5 times (0.5x). Further, the above various conditions have been commercialized, and it is mainly related to one layer or two layers of BD of about 25 GB (or about 27 GB). In order to increase the recording capacity of the BD, a high-density BD having a recording capacity of about 32 GB or about 33.4 GB and a BD having a three-layer or four-layer layer are also under review. An example of such a BD will be described below. <Multilayering of the information recording layer> 76 201021037 When the laser reading layer (cover layer) is used, the composition of the single-sided disc is recorded, the information recording layer is made of 2 layers. In the above, a plurality of information recording layers must be provided between the substrate and the protective layer. A configuration example of such a multilayer disc is shown in Fig. 38. The optical disk shown in Fig. 38 has an integer of (n+1) layers above the information recording layer). Specifically, the optical disk is sequentially laminated with a cover layer 5〇1, (n+1) information recording layers (Ln to L〇 layers) 5〇2, and a substrate finely formed from the surface on the incident side of the field light 200. Further, an intermediate layer 503 serving as an optical buffer material is inserted between each of the information recording layers 502 of (n + ι) 0 pieces. That is, a reference layer (L〇) is disposed at an innermost position (a position farthest from the light source) separated by a predetermined distance from the light incident surface, and the information recording layer (LI, L2) is laminated from the reference layer (10) toward the light and the incident surface side. .....Ln) and add layers. Here, in comparison with the case of a single-layer disc, the distance from the light incident surface to the reference layer L〇 of the multilayer disc can be made almost the same as the distance from the light incident surface of the single-layer disc to the information recording layer. (eg 〇.lmm degree). By the fact that the distance to the deepest layer (the farthest layer) is constant by the number of layers (that is, almost the same distance as the case of a single Φ layer disc), it is possible to ensure that the relevant reference layer is independent of a single layer or a plurality of layers. Interchangeability of access. Further, it is possible to suppress the influence of the inclination which increases as the number of layers increases. The effect of tilting can be suppressed because the innermost layer is most affected by the tilt, but by making the distance to the innermost layer almost the same distance as the single layer disc, even if the number of layers is increased, the distance to the innermost layer will not increase. . Further, the traveling direction of the light spot (or the tracking direction or the spiral direction) may be a same direction or a reverse path. The same direction • The path is in all the information recording layers, and the light points travel in the same direction. That is, the direction of travel of the light 77 201021037 point is in the direction from the inner circumference toward the outer circumference of the full information recording layer, or from the outer circumference toward the inner circumference in the full information recording layer. In the aspect, the reverse path is in the information recording layer and the information recording layer adjacent to the information recording layer, and the light spot travels in the opposite direction. That is, when the rod advance direction of the light spot of the reference layer (L0) is from the inner circumference to the outer circumference, the traveling direction of the light spot of the information recording layer L1 is from the outer circumference to the inner circumference, and the information recording layer L2 The direction of travel of the light spot is from the inner circumference to the outer circumference. That is, the traveling direction of the light spot is in the direction from the inner circumference to the outer circumference in the information recording layer Lm (m is 〇 and even number), and the information recording layer Lm+1 is directed from the outer circumference to the inner circumference. Or, the information recording layer Lm (m is 0 and an even number) is in the direction from the outer circumference to the inner circumference, and the information recording layer Lm+1 is in the direction from the inner circumference to the outer circumference. The thickness of the protective layer (cover layer) is set to be thin, with an increase in the number of openings, NA' shortening the focal length, or suppressing the influence of the skew caused by the tilt. The number of openings is set to 0.45 in the CD and 0.65 in the DVD, and is set to about 0.85 in the BD system. For example, the thickness of the protective layer may be 10 to 200 μm in the total thickness of the information recording medium of 1.2 mm. More specifically, in a substrate of 1.1 mm, a single-layer disc can be provided with a transparent protective layer of 0.1 mm, and a 2 ® layer disc can also be provided with a 0.025 mm intermediate layer at a protective layer of 0.075 mm (Spacer Layer). ). <Configuration Example of Layer 1 to Layer 4> Here, Fig. 39 shows a configuration example of a single layer disc, Fig. 40 shows a configuration example of a layer 2 disc, and Fig. 41 shows a composition of a layer 3 disc. For example, Fig. 42 shows a configuration example of a 4-layer disc. As described above, when the distance from the light-irradiated surface to the reference layer L0 is constant, the total thickness of the disc in any of the discs is 78 201021037, which is about 1.2 mm (including the printing, etc., preferably 1. The thickness of the substrate 500 is about 1.1 mm. Further, the distance from the light irradiation surface to the reference layer L0 was about 0.1 mm. In the single-layer disc shown in Fig. 39 (in the case of n = 第 in Fig. 38), the thickness of the cover layer 5011 is about 0.1 mm. In the two-layer disc shown in Fig. 40 (in the case of n = 1 in Fig. 38), the cover layer 5012 has a thickness of about 0.075 mm, and the intermediate layer 5032 has a thickness of about 〇25 mm. Further, in the case of the three-layer disc of Fig. 41 (in the case of n = 2 in Fig. 38) and the four-layer disc of Fig. 42 (in the case of n = 3 in Fig. 38), the cover layer 5014 is The thickness and/or the thickness of the intermediate layer 5304 can also be thinner. Further, in the recording and reproducing apparatus using the optical head having the objective lens having such a high NA, the aberration such as the spherical aberration caused by the thickness of the surface of the disc irradiating the surface to the information recording layer converges on the information recording layer. The quality of the laser light has a great impact. Therefore, a mechanism for correcting aberration due to thickness is provided. The aberration correcting means gives aberrations to cancel aberrations generated in each information recording layer in order to correct aberration components such as spherical aberration caused by the thickness of the protective layer surface of the optical information recording medium to the information recording layer for recording and reproducing information. Aberration component. The optical design of the aberration correcting mechanism was originally used to reduce the aberration of the information recording layer of the single-layer structure medium, but it is also considered to be the aberration of the information recording medium in which the two-layer structure is recorded and reproduced. The minimum aberration in design is set to about 80|1111 to 90|1111 by the surface of the protective layer. therefore. When the recorded reproducing light converges on the information recording layer having a thickness different from the minimum aberration position, the aberration correcting means is controlled to set the aberration correction value of each information recording layer to be corrected. 79 201021037 <Solid Configuration of BD> Fig. 43 shows the physical configuration of the optical disk 510 to which the present invention can be applied. The disk-shaped optical disk 510 is formed with a plurality of tracks 511 which are, for example, concentric or spiral, and each of the tracks 512 forms a plurality of subdivided sector sectors. Further, as will be described later, each track 512 records data in units of blocks 513 having a predetermined size. Actually, the data is recorded on the track as a data column composed of a plurality of record marks and a plurality of intervals respectively set between the plurality of record marks as the information to be recorded. The optical disk 510 has a PIC (Permanent Information & Control Data) area 514 and an OPC (Optimum Power Control) area 515 on the inner circumference side. The OPC area 515 is used in the test record to find the area that best suits the recording power of the disc or each information recording layer and the conditions for recording the pulse train before recording the user data. Can also be called a learning area. Further, in order to change the recording power and the amount of change in the recording pulse train, etc., in order to generate an environmental change such as inconsistency of the optical disc device, rapid temperature change, adhesion of dust, dust, or the like, the test recording area is performed. The pic area 514 is a reproduction-dedicated area, and the disc management information is recorded by the high-speed modulation groove. The disc official information § has recorded the PC parameters and writing strategy types required for the best recording power, the timing and length of the laser pulse generation (the recording conditions described in the second embodiment) Recommended value, recording line speed, regenerative power, model number, etc. The optical disk 510 is an information recording layer 1 layer having a recording capacity higher than that of a conventional optical disk (for example, a 25 GB BD). The expansion of the recording capacity is achieved by "increasing the recording line density", for example, by making the record number recorded on the handle 80 201021037 shorter. Here, "increasing the recording line density" means shortening the channel bit length. The channel bit is a length corresponding to the period τ of the reference clock (the reference period τ of the modulation when the symbol is recorded by a predetermined modulation rule). Moreover, the optical disk 510 can also be a multi-layered one. However, for convenience of explanation, only the board and one information recording layer are provided. Further, when a plurality of information recording layers are provided, even if the widths of the tracks provided in the respective information recording layers are the same, the marks of the respective layers can be made different in length, and the marks in the same layer are the same length, whereby the recording of each layer can be made. The line density is different. The track 512' is divided into blocks 513 according to the recording unit of the data 64 kB (kilobbit), and the block addresses are allocated in order. The block 513 can be divided into sub-blocks of a predetermined length, and three sub-blocks constitute one block. The sub-blocks are assigned sub-block numbers up to 2 in order from front to back. <Record density> Next, the recording density is described using Fig. 44, Fig. 45, Fig. 46, and Fig. 47. Figure 44 shows an example of a 25GB BD. The wavelength of the laser light 200 of BD is 405 nm, and the number of apertures of the objective lens 220 (Numerical Aperture: NA) is 0.85. Like the DVD, the BD records the recorded data as symbol rows 520, 521 that physically change on the track 512 of the optical disc. The shortest length in the symbol column is the "shortest mark". In the figure, the symbol 521 is the shortest token. The physical length of the shortest mark 521 at the time of 25 GB recording capacity is 0.149 μm. This is equivalent to about 1/2.7 of the DVD. Even if the wavelength parameter (405nm) and the NA parameter (0.85) of the optical system are changed, the resolution of the laser is improved, and the boundary of the record mark that the near beam can recognize is also connected to 81 201021037, that is, Close to the limit of optical resolution. Fig. 46 shows how the light beam is irradiated onto the symbol column recorded on the track 512. With the above optical system parameters, the diameter of the spot 210 of the BD is about 〇·39 μηι. When the recording line density is increased without changing the configuration of the optical system, since the spot diameter of the recording mark with respect to the spot 21 变 becomes small, the resolution of reproduction becomes poor. For example, Fig. 45 shows an example of a disc having a higher recording density than a 25 GB BD. The disc is also a laser beam having a wavelength of 4 〇 5 nm and an aperture of the objective lens 220 (Numerical Aperture: ΝΑ) 0·85. In the symbol row 524, 525 of the disc, the physical length of the shortest symbol 525 is 0.1115 μm. As compared with Fig. 44, since the dot diameter is approximately 〇39 μm, the recording marks are relatively small, and the marks are narrowed, so that the resolution of reproduction is deteriorated. The amplitude of the reproduced signal when the recording symbol is reproduced by the light beam decreases as the recording mark becomes shorter, and the inverse of the period in which the optical resolution becomes the recording mark is called the spatial frequency, and the relationship between the spatial frequency and the signal amplitude is called OTF (Optical Transfer Function). The amplitude of the signal decreases almost linearly as the spatial frequency becomes higher. The limit of regeneration where the signal amplitude becomes zero The frequency is called OTF cutoff. The graph of Fig. 47 shows the relationship between the OTF of the BD of 25 GB recording capacity and the shortest recording mark. The spatial frequency of the shortest mark of BD is about 80% with respect to 〇TF, which is close to 〇TF cutoff. Further, it can be found that the amplitude of the reproduced signal of the shortest mark also becomes about 10% of the maximum detectable amplitude, which is extremely small. When the spatial frequency of the shortest mark of the BD is very close to the 〇TF cutoff, 82 201021037, that is, the recording capacity when the reproduced amplitude hardly appears, is equivalent to about 31 GB at bd. If the frequency of the regenerative signal of the shortest mark is near or below the cutoff frequency of 〇tf, then the limit of the laser resolution may be exceeded, and the regenerative amplitude of the reproduced signal becomes small, which is an area where the SN ratio rapidly deteriorates. Therefore, it can be assumed that the recording line density of the high recording density optical disk of FIG. 45 is the frequency of the shortest mark of the reproduced signal near the cutoff frequency of the 〇TF (including the case below the OTF cutoff frequency but not significantly lower than the 〇TF cutoff frequency). To the OTF wearing frequency above the situation. The graph of Fig. 48 shows an example of the relationship between the signal amplitude and the spatial frequency when the spatial frequency of the shortest symbol (2T) is smaller than the OTF cutoff frequency and the amplitude of the 2T reproduced signal is 〇. In Fig. 48, the spatial frequency of the shortest mark length 2T is 1 12 times the OTF cutoff frequency. <Relationship between wavelength and number of openings and mark length> The relationship between the wavelength of the high recording density optical disk and the number of openings and the length of the mark/length is as follows. The shortest mark length is represented by TMnm, and the shortest interval length is represented by TSnm, and is represented by ''P' (when the shortest mark length + the shortest interval length), p is (TM+TS) nm. In the case of 17 modulation, p= 2T+2T=4T. Use laser wavelength λ (405nm±5nm, ie 4〇〇~410nm), number of openings 0.8 (0.85±0.01, ie 0.84~0.86), and shortest mark + shortest interval length 17 (17 In the case of change, 'Because the shortest length is 2Τ, ρ=2Τ+2Τ=4Τ) In the case of three parameters, 'If the reference Τ is reduced to satisfy the following inequality, the spatial frequency of the shortest mark exceeds the OTF cutoff frequency. Ρ ^ λ /2ΝΑ 83 201021037 By the following formula, the reference Τ of the 〇TF cutoff frequency corresponding to NA=〇85 and λ=4〇5 can be obtained. Also, the space of the shortest mark when ρ> λ/2ΝΑ is satisfied The frequency is lower than the OTF cutoff frequency. τ = 405/(2x0.85)74 = 59.558nm Thus, even if only the recording line density is increased, the SN ratio will be degraded due to the limit of the optical resolution. Therefore, the system margin is _ The SN ratio degradation caused by the multi-layering of the information recording layer may be unacceptable. Especially as shown above. The frequency of the shortest recording mark starts from the vicinity of the cutoff frequency of 〇71?, and the SN ratio is significantly degraded. φ or more, the frequency of the reproduced signal of the shortest s number is compared with the frequency of the 〇tf carrier, and the recording line density is explained. In the case of high density, the relationship between the frequency of the reproduction_signal of the second short mark (the third short mark (record mark of the fourth short mark)) and the OTF cutoff frequency is based on the same principle as described above. In addition, it corresponds to the individual 5 recording density (recording line density, recording capacity). <Record density and number of layers> Here, the specific s recording capacity of one layer having a wavelength of 405 nm and an opening number of 〇·85, etc., when the spatial frequency of the shortest mark is near the cutoff frequency of 〇TF In time, it can be assumed to be, for example, about 29 GB (for example, 29.0 GB ± 0.5 GB or 29 GB ± 1 GB, etc.) or above, or about 3 〇 GB (for example, 3 〇. 〇 GB ± 0.5 GB or 30 GB ± 1 GB, etc.) Or above it, or about 31 GB (for example, 31.0 GB of soil 0.5 GB or 31 GB ± 1 GB, etc.) or above, or about 32 gb (for example, 32.0 GB ± 0.5 GB or 32 GB ± 1 GB, etc.) or above. 'When the spatial frequency of the shortest mark is above the OTF cutoff frequency, the recording capacity of the i layer' can be assumed to be, for example, about 32 GB (for example, 32.0 GB of soil 84 201021037 0.5 GB or 32 GB ± 1 GB, etc.) or above, or Approximately 33 GB (eg, 33.0 GB ± 0.5 GB or 33 GB ± 1 GB, etc.) or above, or approximately 33_3 GB (eg, 33.3 GB ± 0.5 GB or 33.3 GB ± 1 GB, etc.) or above, or approximately 33.4 GB (eg, , 33.4GB ± 0.5GB or 33.4GB ± 1GB, etc.) or above, or about 34GB (for example, 34.0GB ± 0.5GB or 34GB ± 1GB, etc.) or above, or about 35GB (for example, 35.0GB ± 0.5 GB or 35GB 1GB, etc.) or above. In particular, when the recording density is about 33.3 GB, a recording capacity of about 100 GB (99.9 GB) can be realized in three layers, and a recording capacity of 100 GB or more (100.2 GB) can be realized in three layers at about 33.4 GB. This is almost equal to the recording capacity of a 4-layer 25GB BD. For example, when the recording density is 33GB, the difference between 33x3=99GB and 100GB is 1GB (1GB or less), the recording density is 34GB, the difference between 34x3=102GB and 100GB is 2GB (2GB or less), and the recording density is 33.3GB, 33.3. The difference between x3=99.9GB and 100GB is 0.1GB (0.1GB or less), and when the recording density is 33.4GB, the difference between 33.4x3=100.2GB and 100GB is 0.2GB (0.2GB or less), and if the recording density is greatly expanded Then, as described earlier, precision regeneration will become difficult due to the influence of the regeneration characteristics of the shortest mark. Therefore, to suppress the large expansion of the recording density and achieve a recording density of 100 GB or more, about 33.4 GB is a realistic solution. Here, there is an option to make the optical disc have a four-layer structure of one layer of 25 GB or a three-layer structure of one layer of 33 to 34 GB. The multi-layering is accompanied by the influence of the amplitude of the reproduced signal of each information recording layer (the deterioration of the SN ratio) and the multi-layer diffused light (the signal from the adjacent information recording layer). Therefore, by selecting the three-layer structure of 85 201021037 33 to 34 GB instead of the four-layer structure of 25 GB, it is possible to suppress the influence of such diffused light with a small number of layers (three layers instead of four layers). Achieve about 100GB. Therefore, I want to avoid the multi-layered side to achieve 100. (The maker of the disc of 3 can choose 33-34GB of three-layer. On the other hand, I want to maintain the conventional format (recording density of 25GB) and realize about 1〇. The manufacturer of the 碟 之 之 , 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片 片If the recording density of one layer is 30 to 32 GB, the three-layer disc cannot reach 100 GB (90 to 96 GB). The 4-layer disc can achieve 120 GB or more. Among them, if the recording density is about 32 GB, the 4-layer disc The film can achieve a recording capacity of about 128 GB. The number of 128 is also a value that is convenient for the computer to integrate into a square value of 2 (the power of 2 to the power of 2), and achieves a recording density of about 100 GB with a 3-layer disc. In comparison, the regenerative characteristics of the shortest mark here are less stringent. Thus, in terms of expanding the recording density, a plurality of types of recording densities (for example, about 32 GB and about 33.4 GB, etc.) are designed, and recording densities of plural kinds are used. Combined with the number of layers, can be given For the disc manufacturer's freedom of design, for example, for a manufacturer who wants to suppress the influence of multi-layering and increase the capacity, an option of manufacturing a 3-layer disc of about 100 GB made of 33 layers of 33 to 34 GB can be given. For manufacturers who want to suppress the influence of the reproduction characteristics and increase the capacity, it is possible to manufacture a 4-layer disc of about 120 GB or more which is formed by 4 layers of 3 〇 to 32 GB. It is preferable to use the present invention in the recording condition of the recording mark recorded on the BD. At this time, it is also possible to correspond to the information recorded in the information 201021037, but the number of the layer or the distance between the information recording layers, so that δ The conditions of the recorded pulse wave are different. If the number of the information recording layer is increased, the position of the information recording layer is changed, so the distance between the information recording layers becomes larger as the number of information records increases. Short, inter-layer crosstalk increases by one or two, and the regenerative signal changes locally or in its entirety. The change does not depend on the length of the record mark in the same level and $ layer. However, the shorter the record, the greater the impact of the relative change. Therefore, the shorter the record mark, the higher the adjustment accuracy of the e-record mark. : When the present invention is applied to a multi-layer BD, it corresponds to an information recording medium or a message. Recording the pulse condition by setting the number of recorded layers or the distance between the information recording layers can form a more suitable recording mark. Further, if the number of information recording layers is increased, it is necessary to reduce the reflectance of each information recording layer. Therefore, the present invention can also be applied in the case where the reflectance is low. Further, it is also possible to record the pulse wave condition in accordance with the recording power setting range for recording the information recording layer. The recording power setting range such as the peak power can be changed in accordance with the number of layers of the information recording layer of the information recording medium. This is because the intensity of the laser light passing through the information recording layer must be changed as the number of layers is different. When recording at the same speed, the greater the recording power, the greater the recording unevenness of the response characteristics of the laser. Therefore, it is preferable to perform recording adjustment with higher precision as the recording power is larger. For example, the upper limit of the set power value of the information recording medium including the two-layer information recording layer can be set to be higher than the upper limit of the set power value of the information recording medium including the i-layer information recording layer. Similarly, the upper limit of the set power value of the information recording medium including the layer 3 information record 87 201021037 layer can be set to be higher than the set power value of the information recording medium including the layer 2 information recording layer = high; The upper limit of the set power value of the information recording medium of the layer information recording layer can be set to be higher than the upper limit of the set power value of the information recording medium including the three-layer information recording layer. Therefore, when the present invention is applied to a multi-layer BD, the recording pulse condition is set corresponding to the recording power setting range of the information recording medium, and a more suitable recording mark can be formed. [Industrial Applicability] 0 This newsletter can be used in various information recording media such as DVD_RA]V[, BD-RE, or other information recording media that record data signals by laser light and electromagnetic force. Recording and reproduction of the information recording medium t, and recording and reproducing apparatuses such as a DVD drive, a DVD recorder, a bd recorder, recording operations with other machines, and the like may be applied to other uses. [Simplified Schematic Description] [Fig. 1(a) to 1(4) are diagrams showing the recording pulse waveform and recording power for forming a data column including recording marks and intervals. 〇 [Fig. 2(a) to 2(c)] A diagram illustrating an example of the shape of the pulse wave. [Fig. 3] A diagram illustrating a conventional recording control device. [Fig. 4] A diagram illustrating a conventional recording parameter table. [Fig. 5] A diagram illustrating time series of recording marks and intervals. [Fig. 6] A diagram showing the state transition rule determined by the rll 〇, 7) recording code and the equalization mode PR (1, 2, 2, 2, 1) of the embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 7] A trellis diagram corresponding to the state transition rule of Fig. 6 is displayed. 88 201021037 [Fig. 8] A diagram showing the state transition column pattern of PR12221ML. [Fig. 9] A diagram showing a state transition column pattern of PR12221ML. [Fig. 10] A diagram showing a state transition column pattern of PR12221ML. [Fig. 11] A diagram showing an example of the PR equalization ideal waveform shown in Fig. 8. [Fig. 12] A diagram showing an example of the P R equalization ideal waveform shown in Fig. 9. [Fig. 13] A diagram showing an example of the PR equalization ideal waveform shown in Fig. 10. [Fig. 14] An illustration of a signal evaluation device using the PR12221ML method. [Fig. 15] shows a detailed classification of each pattern of the difference degree of the detection pattern of the 卩11 (1, 2, 2, 2, 1)]^^. [Fig. 16] A diagram showing the detailed classification of each pattern of the difference metric of the 12A detection pattern of the PR (1, 2, 2, 2, 1) ML. [Fig. 17] shows a detailed classification of each pattern of the difference metric of the 检测11 (1, 2, 2, 2, 1)]^[128 detection pattern. [Fig. 18] A pattern table showing recording parameters of an embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 19(a) to 19(p)] A diagram illustrating the recording pulse wave corresponding to the pattern table shown in Fig. 18. [Fig. 20] Another chart showing the recording parameters of the embodiment of the present invention. [21st (a) to 21 (p)]] A diagram illustrating the recording pulse wave corresponding to the pattern table shown in Fig. 20. 89 201021037 [Fig. 22] shows another chart of recording parameters of an embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 23(a) to Fig. 23(p)] A diagram illustrating the recording pulse wave corresponding to the pattern table shown in Fig. 22. [Fig. 24] Another chart showing the recording parameters of the embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 25(a) to 25(p)] A diagram illustrating the recording pulse wave corresponding to the pattern table shown in Fig. 24. [Fig. 26] Another chart showing the recording parameters of the embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 27(a) to Fig. 27(p)] A diagram illustrating the recording pulse wave corresponding to the pattern table shown in Fig. 26. [Fig. 28] Another chart showing the recording parameters of the embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 29(a) to Fig. 29(p)] A diagram illustrating the recording pulse wave corresponding to the pattern table shown in Fig. 28. [Fig. 30] Another chart showing the recording parameters of the embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 31(a) to 31(p)] A diagram illustrating the recording pulse wave corresponding to the pattern table shown in Fig. 30. [Fig. 32] Another chart showing the recording parameters of the embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 33(a) to 33(p)] A diagram illustrating the recording pulse wave corresponding to the pattern table shown in Fig. 32. 201021037 [Fig. 34] A block diagram showing an information recording and reproducing apparatus of an embodiment of the present invention. [Fig. 35] A view showing an example of a recording pulse waveform which can be used in the present invention. [Fig. 36] A view showing another example of the recording pulse waveform which can be used in the present invention. [Fig. 37] A view showing another example of the recording pulse waveform which can be used in the present invention. ® [Fig. 38] A schematic view showing a configuration example of an information recording medium to which the present invention can be applied. [Fig. 39] A schematic diagram showing the constitution of a single layer of information recording medium. • [Fig. 40] A schematic diagram showing the structure of the information recording medium of the second layer. - [Fig. 41] A schematic diagram showing the structure of the information recording medium of the third layer. [Fig. 42] A schematic diagram showing the structure of a 4-layer information recording medium. [Fig. 43] A schematic diagram showing the physical composition of the information recording medium. [Fig. 44] A mode diagram showing the point of the laser beam and the mark recorded on the track. [Fig. 45] shows other mode diagrams of the point of the laser beam and the mark recorded on the track. [Fig. 46] A schematic diagram showing a state in which a laser beam is irradiated onto a column of data recorded on a track. [Fig. 47] A graph showing the relationship between the OTF and the shortest recorded mark. [Fig. 48] Another graph showing the relationship between the OTF and the shortest recorded mark. [Description of main component symbols] 91 201021037 1.. Information recording media 2.. Optical head 3.. Preamplifier section 4.. .AGC section 5.. Waveform equalization section 6.. . A/D Conversion unit 7. PLL unit 8. PR normalization unit 9.. Maximum probability decoding unit 10. Edge shift detection unit 11... Record pattern generation unit 12: Record compensation unit 13... Laser drive unit 14. Recording power setting unit 15.. Information recording control unit 16. Recording compensation parameter determining unit 100.. Information recording and reproducing device 101.. Recording control unit 102: Regenerative signal processing unit 200.. .Laser light 201.. . Peak power 202.. . Bottom value power 203... Cooling power 204.. Interval power 205.. .Quench level 210.. . Spot 500.. . Substrate 501. . Covering layer 502...Information recording layer 503...Intermediate layer 510...Disc 511.. .Most track 512.. Track 513.. Block 514.. .PIC area 515.. .0 .C area 520, 521 ... symbol row 701, 704, 707... pattern detecting unit 702, 705, 708... difference metric calculating unit 703, 706, 709... memory unit
9292
Claims (1)
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2008256809 | 2008-10-01 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
TW201021037A true TW201021037A (en) | 2010-06-01 |
Family
ID=42073181
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
TW098133160A TW201021037A (en) | 2008-10-01 | 2009-09-30 | Information recording medium and recording/reproduction apparatus |
Country Status (12)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US8446810B2 (en) |
EP (1) | EP2343702A4 (en) |
JP (1) | JPWO2010038397A1 (en) |
KR (1) | KR20110059816A (en) |
CN (1) | CN101874268B (en) |
AU (1) | AU2009299344A1 (en) |
BR (1) | BRPI0905746A2 (en) |
MX (1) | MX2010005823A (en) |
MY (1) | MY151264A (en) |
RU (1) | RU2506655C2 (en) |
TW (1) | TW201021037A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2010038397A1 (en) |
Families Citing this family (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2009080895A (en) * | 2007-09-26 | 2009-04-16 | Toshiba Corp | Information recording medium and disk device using the medium |
US8289829B2 (en) * | 2008-10-01 | 2012-10-16 | Panasonic Corporation | Information recording medium and recording/reproduction apparatus |
US8149673B2 (en) * | 2008-10-09 | 2012-04-03 | Panasonic Corporation | Optical recording method, optical recording device, master medium exposure device, optical information recording medium, and reproducing method |
JP5011326B2 (en) * | 2009-02-24 | 2012-08-29 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Information recording medium, address generation and detection method, reproduction and recording apparatus |
MX2010014205A (en) * | 2009-03-09 | 2011-02-21 | Panasonic Corp | Information recording medium, method for recording information on information recording medium, method for reproducing information from information recording medium, and method for manufacturing information recording medium. |
WO2012140824A1 (en) * | 2011-04-11 | 2012-10-18 | 日立コンシューマエレクトロニクス株式会社 | Multilayer information recording medium, and information playback method and information recording method employing same |
JP5273221B2 (en) * | 2011-07-20 | 2013-08-28 | 船井電機株式会社 | Optical disk recording device |
JP2018113088A (en) * | 2017-01-12 | 2018-07-19 | 株式会社東芝 | Storage device, controller circuit, recording and reproducing method |
WO2020100777A1 (en) * | 2018-11-15 | 2020-05-22 | パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 | Optical disk device |
CN109379169B (en) * | 2018-12-07 | 2021-03-23 | 中国电子科技集团公司第五十四研究所 | Code speed adjusting device for resisting sudden large error code |
Family Cites Families (31)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
MY125795A (en) | 1998-07-23 | 2006-08-30 | Samsung Electronics Co Ltd | Adaptive writing method for high-density optical recording apparatus and circuit thereof |
TW468177B (en) * | 1998-08-04 | 2001-12-11 | Hitachi Ltd | Data storage method, data storage medium and data storage recording device |
US7082566B2 (en) * | 2001-11-09 | 2006-07-25 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Signal quality evaluation method, information recording/reproducing system, and recording compensation method |
RU2302043C2 (en) * | 2002-06-05 | 2007-06-27 | Эл Джи Электроникс Инк. | Linking zone structure made on carrier only for reading high density records, method and device for manufacturing and reading the carrier |
US20060274625A1 (en) * | 2003-04-04 | 2006-12-07 | Atsushi Nakamura | Recording medium data recording method and device |
US7038869B2 (en) * | 2003-04-14 | 2006-05-02 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Recording control apparatus, recording and reproduction apparatus, and recording control method |
JP2004335079A (en) | 2003-04-14 | 2004-11-25 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Recording control unit, recording and reproducing device, and recording control method |
JP4197452B2 (en) * | 2003-04-21 | 2008-12-17 | パイオニア株式会社 | Information recording apparatus and information recording method |
JP2007527087A (en) * | 2003-07-07 | 2007-09-20 | エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレーテッド | RECORDING MEDIUM, RECORDING MEDIUM CONTROL INFORMATION CONFIGURATION METHOD, RECORDING / REPRODUCING METHOD AND DEVICE USING THE SAME |
DK1652178T3 (en) * | 2003-07-07 | 2009-08-24 | Lg Electronics Inc | Recording medium, method of configuring control information thereof, method of recording or reproducing data using the same and apparatus therefor |
DK1760702T3 (en) * | 2003-08-14 | 2010-06-21 | Lg Electronics Inc | Recording medium, method for configuring control information therefor, method for recording and reproducing using the same, and apparatus therefor |
JP2005092942A (en) * | 2003-09-16 | 2005-04-07 | Hitachi Ltd | Method for optical disk recording, optical disk device, and optical disk |
JP2005092952A (en) * | 2003-09-16 | 2005-04-07 | Ricoh Co Ltd | Recording condition setting method, recording method, program and recording medium, and optical disk device |
CN1882989A (en) * | 2003-09-18 | 2006-12-20 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Recording/reproducing method and recording/reproducing device |
EP1679709A1 (en) * | 2003-10-31 | 2006-07-12 | Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. | Recording method, recording apparatus, program and recording control apparatus |
EP1557417B1 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2007-03-07 | Sanofi-Aventis | Substituted 8'-pyri(mi)dinyl-dihydrospiro-[cycloalkylamine]-pyrimido[1,2-a] pyrimidin-6-one derivatives |
CN101599277B (en) * | 2004-01-09 | 2011-05-04 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Optical recording method, optical disc medium, and reproducing method |
CN101814306B (en) * | 2004-11-02 | 2012-06-06 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Disc device |
CN1922663B (en) * | 2004-12-07 | 2010-08-11 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Access device, access method and control device |
JP4847864B2 (en) * | 2005-02-18 | 2011-12-28 | パナソニック株式会社 | Optical disc discrimination method and optical disc apparatus |
CN101223601B (en) * | 2005-07-15 | 2010-06-16 | 松下电器产业株式会社 | Recording/reproducing device, recording condition adjusting device and recording/reproducing method |
JP4274183B2 (en) * | 2005-11-24 | 2009-06-03 | ソニー株式会社 | Recording / reproducing apparatus and laser driving pulse adjusting method |
JP2007317343A (en) * | 2006-04-28 | 2007-12-06 | Sharp Corp | Recording parameter setting device, program thereof, computer-readable recording medium containing the program, information recording medium, and recording parameter setting method |
JP4556912B2 (en) | 2006-05-29 | 2010-10-06 | Tdk株式会社 | Recording condition setting method for optical recording medium |
JP2008033981A (en) * | 2006-07-26 | 2008-02-14 | Tdk Corp | Method of recording information on optical recording medium, and optical recording device |
JP2008112509A (en) | 2006-10-31 | 2008-05-15 | Sanyo Electric Co Ltd | Optical disc recording apparatus |
JP2008159231A (en) * | 2006-12-26 | 2008-07-10 | Toshiba Corp | Optical disk recording/reproducing device and optical disk recording/reproducing method |
JP4523583B2 (en) * | 2006-12-27 | 2010-08-11 | 太陽誘電株式会社 | Data recording evaluation method and optical disk recording / reproducing apparatus |
BRPI0715675A2 (en) * | 2006-12-28 | 2013-07-09 | Panasonic Corp | Information recording medium evaluation method, information recording medium, information recording medium manufacturing method, signal processing method, and access control device |
US8289829B2 (en) * | 2008-10-01 | 2012-10-16 | Panasonic Corporation | Information recording medium and recording/reproduction apparatus |
US20100080095A1 (en) * | 2008-10-01 | 2010-04-01 | Panasonic Corporation | Recording control method, recording/reproduction method, recording control apparatus and recording/reproduction apparatus |
-
2009
- 2009-09-25 MY MYPI20102463 patent/MY151264A/en unknown
- 2009-09-25 KR KR1020107011719A patent/KR20110059816A/en not_active Application Discontinuation
- 2009-09-25 EP EP09817440.2A patent/EP2343702A4/en not_active Withdrawn
- 2009-09-25 AU AU2009299344A patent/AU2009299344A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2009-09-25 BR BRPI0905746-3A patent/BRPI0905746A2/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2009-09-25 CN CN200980101112.3A patent/CN101874268B/en active Active
- 2009-09-25 MX MX2010005823A patent/MX2010005823A/en active IP Right Grant
- 2009-09-25 WO PCT/JP2009/004892 patent/WO2010038397A1/en active Application Filing
- 2009-09-25 RU RU2010121651/28A patent/RU2506655C2/en active
- 2009-09-25 JP JP2010531724A patent/JPWO2010038397A1/en active Pending
- 2009-09-25 US US12/745,009 patent/US8446810B2/en active Active
- 2009-09-30 TW TW098133160A patent/TW201021037A/en unknown
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN101874268A (en) | 2010-10-27 |
US20100309773A1 (en) | 2010-12-09 |
RU2010121651A (en) | 2011-12-10 |
MX2010005823A (en) | 2010-06-21 |
US8446810B2 (en) | 2013-05-21 |
AU2009299344A1 (en) | 2010-04-08 |
WO2010038397A1 (en) | 2010-04-08 |
BRPI0905746A2 (en) | 2020-11-24 |
JPWO2010038397A1 (en) | 2012-03-01 |
CN101874268B (en) | 2014-06-18 |
RU2506655C2 (en) | 2014-02-10 |
EP2343702A1 (en) | 2011-07-13 |
EP2343702A4 (en) | 2013-12-25 |
KR20110059816A (en) | 2011-06-07 |
MY151264A (en) | 2014-04-30 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
TW201021037A (en) | Information recording medium and recording/reproduction apparatus | |
JP5450376B2 (en) | Signal evaluation method and signal evaluation apparatus | |
US8355307B2 (en) | Optical recording method, optical recording device, master medium exposure device, optical information recording medium, and reproducing method | |
CN101114470B (en) | Information recording method for optical recording medium and optical recording apparatus | |
US8289829B2 (en) | Information recording medium and recording/reproduction apparatus | |
WO2010038398A1 (en) | Information recording medium and recording/reproducing device | |
WO2010103769A1 (en) | Information recording medium, method for recording information on information recording medium, method for reproducing information from information recording medium, and method for manufacturing information recording medium | |
US8243571B2 (en) | Reproduced signal evaluating method, information recording medium, reproducing device, and recording device | |
WO2010038432A1 (en) | Reproduced signal evaluating method, information recording medium, reproducing device, and recording device | |
WO2010103770A1 (en) | Information recording medium, method for recording information on information recording medium, method for reproducing information from information recording medium, and method for manufacturing information recording medium | |
US8179760B2 (en) | Reproduction signal evaluation method, information recording medium, reproduction apparatus and recording apparatus | |
US8363530B2 (en) | Information reproduction method, information recording method, and information recording medium | |
US8274873B2 (en) | Optical recording method, optical recording apparatus, apparatus for manufacturing a master through exposure process, optical information recording medium and reproduction method | |
JP2010140519A (en) | Maximum likelihood decoding method of reproduction signal, optical disk device, integrated circuit, and optical disk |